2010 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Guide

2010 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Guide
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
䡵 Rollover Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 8
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
wherever you drive.
This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both
on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform
tasks for which conventional two-wheel drive enclosed
vehicles were not intended. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger cars both on-road and
off-road, so take time to become familiar with your As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
vehicle.
accident. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
The two-wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for
Section 5 of this manual.
on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
5
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track, if
this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some
other vehicles may not.
1
6
INTRODUCTION
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
injury. Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts
provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always
buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION
7
1
8
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against opWARNING!
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proceAny modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
death.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . 14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . 14
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate . . . . . . 20
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate . . . . . . . . 20
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . 21
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 22
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 31
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 24
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 34
䡵 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Rear Power Windows (Four-Door Models
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Upper Half Door Window Removal
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Upper Half Door Window Installation
䡵 Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Front Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) . . . . . 29
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor
Lockout (Four-Door Models Only) . . . . . . . . . 44
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 45
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . 48
11
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 72
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic
bag with the key code number on it. If you received your
keys without the bag, ask your authorized dealer to give
you the number. The key code can also be obtained by
your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
1. Place the shift lever in the PARK position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (ACCESSORY)
position.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON
4 — START
3. Push the ignition key inward.
4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (ACCESSORY)
position.
2. Push the ignition key inward.
13
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition, and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
3. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, and
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
remove the key.
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
WARNING!
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal, or the shift lever. Do
not leave the key in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved
approximately a half turn in either direction, and the key
is not in the ignition, the steering wheel will lock.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel one–
half revolution from the straight ahead position, turn off
the engine, and remove the key. Rotate the steering wheel
slightly in both directions until the lock engages.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Insert the key in the ignition, and turn the wheel slightly
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
to the left or right, to disengage the lock.
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it. switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unautho- electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
or unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
15
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
compatible with some aftermarket remote starting syswith a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
problems and loss of security protection.
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. DuAll of the keys provided with your new vehicle have plication of keys may be performed at an authorized
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
Replacement Keys
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle that has never been programmed.
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
be programmed to any other vehicle.
authorized dealer.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
then turn off.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be proseconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
grammed during this procedure.
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
authorized dealer for details.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sysTurn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and tem’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
remove the second key.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following procedure:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an signals when activated. The horn will sound, the headauthorized dealer at the time of service to be lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If disturbance is still present
reprogrammed.
(driver’s door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after
General Information
three minutes, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
NOTE: The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm
subject to the following conditions:
are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the
• This device must accept any interference that may be differences in the horn. In case one should go off in the
received, including interference that may cause undes- future, you will need to know which mode has been
activated in order to deactivate it.
ired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
swing gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. The
Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Set the Alarm
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors
and swing gate, or when you use the power door lock
switch while the door is open. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light (located on
the instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.
During this 16 second arming period, opening any door
or the swing gate will cancel the arming. If the Vehicle
Security Alarm successfully arms, the Vehicle Security
Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the Vehicle
Security Alarm is set.
triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors.
Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed
(after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver’s door
with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked
To Disarm the System
To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.
press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, or
turn the ignition key to the ON position. If something has
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
19
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights will come on when you open any door.
The lights will remain on after all of the doors are closed,
and then fade to off or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is turned on.
2
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
swing gate, and activate the Panic Alarm from a maximum distance of 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Three Button RKE Transmitter
1 — Lock
2 — Unlock
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock the Doors and Swing Gate
Press and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button
once to unlock the driver’s door only, or twice to unlock
all the doors and swing gate. When the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button is pressed, the Illuminated Entry will
initiate and the parking lights will flash twice.
4. Test this feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button
while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
upon the first RKE transmitter UNLOCK button press, Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate
using the following procedure:
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed 5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
RKE transmitter.
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
2. Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button
for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds,
then press and hold the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
To Lock the Doors and Swing Gate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
turned on or off using the following steps:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
1. Press the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
10 seconds.
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds),
the system.
press the RKE transmitter PANIC button. Release both
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock”
buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by NOTE: The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be
turned on or off using the following steps:
repeating this procedure.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to
10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four
seconds) press the RKE transmitter LOCK button. Release both buttons.
3. Test the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature outside of
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
the vehicle, by pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
button with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the
time, or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
key removed.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be reactivated
by repeating this procedure.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
of battery is five years.
contact your authorized dealer for details.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
General Information
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
or CB radios.
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply;
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
2
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade (screwdriver) to pry the two
halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Use extreme care not
to damage the seal or internal components.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, •
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
•
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
•
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- •
niently from outside the vehicle while still •
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
Battery at an acceptable charge level
RKE PANIC button not pressed
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
25
To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
• For security, power window operation is disabled
Vehicle
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
cycle.
Start request.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
1. Grasp the half door window and pull upward.
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
in order to drive the vehicle.
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door
panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak
into the vehicles interior.
Upper Half Door Window
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
27
Upper Half Door Window Installation — If
Equipped
1. Grasp the half door window and line up pins into
pockets in lower door.
2
2. Push down to ensure the half door window is fully
seated.
Front Door Removal
1. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx威 head driver).
2. Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instrument panel by pressing the tab at the side of the
connector and pulling to disconnect.
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the red latch on the connector is locked, push
the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch
on one end (right) of the connector. This will unlock the
connector tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and
enabling the harness to be disconnected.
3. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. Be careful
not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror
may damage paint.
4. With the door open, lift the door to clear hinge pins
from their hinges, and remove door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
1 — Harness Connector
2 — Body Hook
3 — Door/Harness Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
1. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and
lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx威 head driver).
2
4. Unplug the wiring harness connector.
NOTE: If the red latch on the connector is locked, push
the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch
on one end (right) of the connector. This will unlock the
2. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
connector tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and
3. Remove the trim access door from the bottom of enabling the harness to be disconnected.
B-pillar.
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
The front (two-door models) and rear doors (four-door
models) are equipped with a rocker-type interior door
lock. To lock the door when leaving your vehicle, press
the LOCK position and close the door.
5. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.
6. With the door open, lift the door to clear hinge pins
from their hinges, and remove door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the
opposite order.
Manual Door Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
NOTE: The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle
is used to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, and
console storage.
2
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The door lock switch is located on each front door panel.
Press the switch downward to lock the doors, and
upward to unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with position.
power door locks if:
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
1. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature is doors.
enabled.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed programming.
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
3. The transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK. its previous setting.
4. The driver door is opened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
NOTE: Use the “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” Automatic Door Locks Programming
The “Automatic Door Locks” feature can be enabled or
feature in accordance with local laws.
disabled as follows:
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power 1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
1. The “Automatic Door Locks” feature is enabled.
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
position.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the
3. All doors are closed.
doors.
4. The throttle is pressed.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
programming.
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) its previous setting.
transmitter.
NOTE: Use the “Automatic Door Locks” feature in
accordance with local laws.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The power window switches are located on the instrument panel center stack (below the radio). The top left
switch controls the left front window and the top right
switch controls the right front window. The lower left
switch controls the left rear passenger window (fourdoor models), and the lower right switch controls the
right rear passenger window (four-door models). The
switches will continue to function for up to two minutes
after the ignition key has been removed, or until a front
door is opened.
Power Window Switches
Window Lockout Switch (Four-Door Models Only)
The window lockout switch (located between the window switches) allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located on the back of the center floor
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
console. To disable the window controls, press the win- Rear Power Windows (Four-Door Models Only)
dow lockout button downward. To enable the window The rear passenger window switches are located on the
back of the center floor console.
controls, press the window lockout button upward.
2
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
The power window switches remain active for two
minutes after the ignition has been turned off. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
Rear Power Window Switches (Four-Door Models)
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized
by adjusting window opening.
REAR SWING GATE
The swing gate can be unlocked by using the key, Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or by activating the
power door lock switches located on the front doors.
Gate Handle
To open the swing gate, press the button on the gate NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting
handle.
to close the swing gate (hard top models only).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the
rear flip-up window, as damage to the blade will
result.
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and
your passengers could be injured by these fumes.
Keep the flip-up window closed when you are operating the vehicle.
37
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers,
Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front
passenger, and side airbags (if equipped) for both the
driver and front passenger. If you will be carrying
children too small for adult-sized belts, your seat belts
can also be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different
rates of inflation that are based on collision severity.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
injuries, including fatalities, if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle have combination
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. But in a colliBuckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even sion, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat using
a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
41
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that the
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely
to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear
your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are
meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
NOTE: The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
Removing Slack from Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and
have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
43
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout
(Four-Door Models Only)
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the 60% rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE:
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled
out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
• If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your authorized dealer for service. Failure
to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat positions, the shoulder belt anchorage
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push in on the anchorage near
your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach
the position that serves you best.
45
WARNING!
Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped
with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove
any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a
collision. This device improves the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert威 will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module. Like the airbags, the
pretensioners are a single use item. After a collision that
is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
they must be replaced.
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert威.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
47
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC/ON position (do not
the best way to keep the baby safe.
start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
Light to turn off.
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
the force if there is a collision.
buckled.
Seat Belt Extender
4. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
completed the programming.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure. dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exSeat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
tender and store it.
while the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened.
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and stow the seat belt extender
when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
steering wheel. The front passenger airbag is mounted in
the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
letters SRS are embossed on the airbag covers.
1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
49
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
2
If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags, they are
located inside the driver and front passenger seats, and
their covers are also labeled SRS.
Side Airbag Location
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not attach cupholders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the objects into occupants, causing serious
injury.
• Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers.
These items may cause serious injury during inflation.
• Do not store or place items under the front seats.
You may damage the airbag wiring harnesses.
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
(Continued) inflation that are based on severity and type of collision.
Along with the seat belts, Advanced Front Airbags work
with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
51
improved protection for the driver and front passenger. If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu- seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
pant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the (Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section.)
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
You should read the instructions provided with your
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
buckled up in a rear seat.
2. All occupants should ALWAYS use their lap and
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride shoulder belts properly.
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag. An 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
infants in that position.
Airbags room to inflate.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat, in a
child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older
children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
4. Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side
airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under “If Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
You Need Assistance” in Section 9 of this manual.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Airbags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need room
to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Front Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
• Front Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (If Equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
53
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
required for this vehicle.
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
side airbags is required in a frontal or side collision. little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic initial deceleration.
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, side airbags,
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
and front seat belt, as required, depending on each type
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of impact.
of collision.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addiBecause airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not exdeployed.
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating airbag.
How the Airbag System Works
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON positions. If the key is in the LOCK
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
airbags are not on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked
immediately.
• Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning • The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
Light for six to eight seconds for a self-check
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light
inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
inflation rates are possible, based on the collision type
will sound if the light comes on again after initial
and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and
startup.
the upper right side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink
your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
55
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
or ON positions. These include all of the items previously
mentioned.
based on the severity and type of collision, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating side
airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between
the occupant and the door. The side airbags fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side airbag moves at a very
• The Side Impact (SRS) Seat-Mounted Side Airbags
high speed and with such a high force, that it could injure
(If Equipped) are designed to activate only in certain
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
side collisions.
positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the especially applies to children.
side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
collision.
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides
of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If a Deployment Occurs
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the airbag system.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front • Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioner, and seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
57
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
2
• Unlock the doors automatically.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System to perform the
following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure.
(Continued)
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Comes on for any period of time while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either highspeed deceleration data or change in velocity during
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following NOTE:
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system 1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
promptly:
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica• Does not come on during the six to eight seconds after tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
the ignition switch is first turned on.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
• Remains on after the six to eight second interval.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
59
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com- preserved.
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
Group LLC product.
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
4. Otherwise required by law.
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
airbag system
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
Vehicle speed
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
Engine RPM
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
Brake switch status
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Pedal position
Data parameters that are recorded:
•
•
•
•
•
• And other parameters
configuration
depending
on
vehicle
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one-year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two
types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing:
infant carriers and “convertible” child seats.
61
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more than
20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System in this section.)
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of
seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the
seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
restraint:
retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
“Automatic Locking Mode” in this section.
Standards. The manufacturer also recommends that
you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
63
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
cause serious personal injury.
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
Older Children and Child Restraints
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
the buckle with the release button facing out.
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle than one year. These child seats are also held in the
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
again. If you still cannot make the child restraint restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child
secure, try a different seating position.
Seat Anchorage System in this section).
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
For additional information, refer to
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt- NOTE:
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s weblap/shoulder belt.
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend Installing the Child Restraint System
over the front of the seat when their back is against the We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat. manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug connector for attachment to the lower anchorage, and a
as possible.
means for adjusting the tension of the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rearward-facing infant
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having
slouching can move the belt out of position.
a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage, and
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the a means for adjusting the tension of the strap.
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
the back.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seatback. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
65
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instrucYour vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
tions that come with the child restraint system.
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH- system provides for the installation of the child restraint
compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
belts.
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
an unattended child in the vehicle.
All three rear seating positions of the four door model
have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
webbing-mounted lower attachments. The two door
model can accommodate flexible LATCH-compatible
child seats in the two outboard seating positions only.
The two door model does not have a center seating
position. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must
be installed in the outboard positions only in both the
two door and four door models. Regardless of the
specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install
LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats share
a common lower anchorage.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
67
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the
meets the seatback, and are visible when you
LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard
lean into the rear seat to install the child
position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the
center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH- restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
compatible, you can only install the child restraints using along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to “Installing Child surfaces.
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” in this section for
typical installation instructions.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Latch Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
Latch Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
69
a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage, and
a means for adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material.
Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat
where you are placing the child restraint and attach the
tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the
tether strap to provide the most direct path between the
anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
straps as you push the child restraint rearward and
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instrucconnector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
tions.
means for adjusting the tension of the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
For the outboard seating positions, route the tether under
the head rest, and attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
your vehicle.
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or SAFETY TIPS
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Transporting Passengers
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. AREA.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
WARNING!
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures”
in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
73
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
75
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for located and corrected immediately.
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
䡵 uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 84
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ uconnect™ phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
uconnect™ phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
䡵 Voice Recognition (VR) System
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation . . . 112
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . .
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . .
▫ Front Easy Entry Seats — Two Door
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . .
▫ Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . .
▫ Removing The Rear Seat — Two Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Replacing The Rear Seat — Two Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ To Raise The Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
. . . . . . . . . . 128
. . . . . . . . . . 129
. . . . . . . . . . 129
. . . . . . . . . . 130
. . . . . . . . . . 131
. . . . . . . . . . 131
. . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 133
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 135
79
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 䡵 Electrical Power Outlet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 139
▫ Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ To Set a Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 䡵 Dual Top — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Removing The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Installing The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 䡵 Freedom Top™ Three-Piece Modular Hard Top
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Panel(s) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
䡵 Soft Top — Two Door Models
. . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Freedom Top™ Storage Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . 176
▫ Front Panel(s) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . 178
▫ Front Panel(s) Installation With Rear Hard
Top Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
▫ Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Rear Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Rear Hard Top Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
䡵 Door Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Door Frame Removal — Two-Door Models . . 166
▫ Door Frame Installation
— Two-Door Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Door Frame Removal — Four-Door Models . . 169
▫ Door Frame Installation — Four-Door
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
䡵 Soft Top (Four-Door Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
▫ Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top . . . . 201
▫ Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top . . . . . . 204
▫ Folding Down The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Putting Up The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
䡵 Sunrider威 (Two-Door Models)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Opening The Sunrider威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Closing The Sunrider威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
䡵 Sunrider威 (Four-Door Models)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Opening The Sunrider威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Closing The Sunrider威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
䡵 Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Lowering The Windshield And Removing
Side Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
81
▫ Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side
Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Rear Window Features — Hard Top Only . . . . 237
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . 238
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Outside Rearview Mirror
83
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirrors
Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To use the
mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror
cover upward.
uconnect™ phone — IF EQUIPPED
uconnect™ phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. uconnect™ phone allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the uconnect™ phone.
NOTE: The uconnect™ phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Version 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
uconnect™ phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
85
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
The uconnect™ phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect™ features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so uconnect™ phone Phone Button
works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
(phone button) and
(voice
buttons
uconnect™ phone. The uconnect™ phone allows up to
recognition button) that will enable you to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only access the system.
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra- the uconnect™ phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
dio. The individual buttons are described in the certain radios.
“Operation” section.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect™
The uconnect™ phone can be used with any Hands-Free
phone and to navigate through the uconnect™ phone
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your celluuconnect™ phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
specific command and then guided through the available
Profile) you may not be able to use any uconnect™ phone
options.
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
phone manufacturer for details.
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
The uconnect™ phone is fully integrated with the vehiprompt.
cle’s audio system. The volume of the uconnect™ phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
switch), if so equipped.
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
uconnect™ phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The uconnect™ phone will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
87
To activate the uconnect™ phone from idle, simply press
the
button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All uconnect™ phone sessions begin with a
button on the radio control head.
press of the
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) uconnect™ phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your uconnect™ phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following are general phone to uconnect™ phone • You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
pairing instructions:
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
• Press the
button to begin.
phones to your uconnect™ phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
connected to your uconnect™ phone. The priority
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
allows the uconnect™ phone to know which cellular
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiuconnect™ phone will use the priority three cellular
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number
give the uconnect™ phone a name for your cellular • Press the
button to begin.
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
⬙Dial.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
• The uconnect™ phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the
button to begin.
89
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
• The uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect™ phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say •
“Call.⬙
•
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the uconnect™ phonebook
Press the
button to begin.
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
uconnect™ phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect™
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- website for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
• To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect™)
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
main menu.
Name” section.
The uconnect™ phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
made to the uconnect™ phone, for example, after you
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
start the vehicle.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, uconnect™ phone automati- • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
to the uconnect™ phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
91
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect™
phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected celluBluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonelar phone is accessible.
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
• Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded. Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
book.
these entries from your phone.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or NOTE:
deleted on the uconnect™ phone. These can only be • The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are transtransfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
ferred and updated to uconnect™ phone on the next
phone connection.
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the uconnect™ phone, and then send the address book
entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone Owner’s
Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the
Bluetooth威 connection.
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
will only use the first 24 characters.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
Edit uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be number to a name entry that already exists in the
deleted or edited.
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
93
from the list, press the
button while the
uconnect™ phone is playing the desired entry and say
⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the uconnect™ phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
when the vehicle is not in motion.
wish to delete.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
language is deleted.
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
deleted or edited.
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
Delete/Erase “All” uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
button to begin.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List • Press the
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
Delete uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The uconnect™ phone will ask you to verify that you • To call one of the names in the list, press the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say ⬙Call.⬙
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations
at this point.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
• The uconnect™ phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• The selected number will be dialed.
deleted.
List All Names in the uconnect™ Phonebook
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
button to begin.
• Press the
uconnect™ phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the uconnect™ phone. Check with your
• The uconnect™ phone will play the names of all the
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
uconnect™ phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
button until you hear a
call, press and hold the
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
cellular phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The uconnect™ phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
95
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed by
the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call.
The first call will be on hold while the second call is in
progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The uconnect™ phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
uconnect™ phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
uconnect™ phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
97
uconnect™ phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the uconnect™ phone is
using:
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect™ phone either until the call • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
the name of the language you wish to switch to
cessation of the call on the uconnect™ phone and
English, Espanol, or Francais.
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
the language selection.
continue on the uconnect™ phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
from the uconnect™ phone to the cellular phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the NOTE: After every uconnect™ phone language change
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languageOFF.
specific and usable across all languages.
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency • If supported, this number may be programmable on
button and say
number for your area.
some systems. To do this, press the
‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect™ phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as • The uconnect™ phone does slightly lower your
follows:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cellular phone directly.
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the uconnect™ phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
uconnect™ phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cellular phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect™
phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
99
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
• Press the
button to begin.
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say work properly with the uconnect™ phone.
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the with Automated Systems.⬙
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528- Working with Automated Systems
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14- This method is used in instances where one generally has
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour navigating through an automated telephone system.
⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details in the Warranty
Information Booklet and on the 24–Hour Towing You can use your uconnect™ phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
Assistance Card.
or automated customer service line. Some services re• If supported, this number may be programmable on
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
button and
some systems. To do this, press the
that may be too quick for use of the uconnect™ phone.
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your uconnect™ phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a
press the
number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is
also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
call and then press the
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
The uconnect™ phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
button and say, ⬙Pair a
a...,⬙ you could press the
Phone⬙ to select that option without having to listen to
the rest of the voice prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect™ phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the uconnect™ phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Press the
button to begin.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The uconnect™ phone will audio system. The uconnect™ phone will work the same
play the current confirmation prompt status and you as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
will be given the choice to change it.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the uconnect™ phone to play it on the
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
your cellular phone, the uconnect™ phone will provide may feel that the call did not go through even though the
notification to inform you of your phone and network call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
status when you are attempting to make a phone call hear the audio.
using uconnect™ phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the uconnect™ phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the uconnect™ phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the uconnect™ phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
from your uconnect™ phone paired cellular phone to the
uconnect™ phone or vice versa, press the
button
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
uconnect™ phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a uconnect™ phone paired cellular
phone and the uconnect™ phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
button to begin.
• Press the
The uconnect™ phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect™ phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
103
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
• The uconnect™ phone will play the phone names of
uconnect™ phone will return to using the highest
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
priority phone present in or near (approximately
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
button and say
phone being announced, press the
“Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for Delete uconnect™ phone Paired Cellular Phones
an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired • Press the
button to begin.
phone.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Select Another Cellular Phone
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the uconnect™ phone.
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• Press the
button to begin.
• You can also press the
button at any time while
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
wish to delete.
• You can also press the
button at any time while
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your uconnect™
phone
uconnect™ phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect™
phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
uconnect™ phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
From outside the uconnect™ phone mode (e.g., from • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
radio mode):
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Press the
button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
105
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would • When navigating through an automated system such
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
you.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking • Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
during a voice recognition period.
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the uconnect™ phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect™ phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
compromised with the convertible top down.
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the uconnect™ phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the uconnect™ phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
111
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by raised voice level.
the party responsible for compliance could void the
WARNING!
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Any voice commanded system should be used only
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
• This device must accept any interference received,
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
including interference that may cause undesired
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
operation.
accident causing serious injury or death.
VOICE RECOGNITION (VR) SYSTEM — IF
button, you will hear a beep.
When you press the
EQUIPPED
The beep is your signal to give a command.
Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
player, and a memo recorder.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
button, listen for the beep, and say a normal speaking volume.
options, press the
your command.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton while the system is speaking is dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
Pressing the
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted, set to low.
and after the beep, you can add or change commands. At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
This will become helpful once you start to learn the commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
options.
button
To hear the first available Menu, press the
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
Commands
These commands are universal and can be used from any The Voice Recognition (VR) system understands two
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon types of commands. Universal commands are available at
the active application.
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are radio mode is active.
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni- • “Next Station” (to select the next station)
tion (VR) system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
setting for VR is different than the audio system.
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the
button. You may say
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
“Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.
Radio FM
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
115
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the
button to stop
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Language Dutch”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Language Italian”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Language English”
button
— During the playback you may press the
• “Language French”
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of
• “Language Spanish”
the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Tutorial”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Voice Training”
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the
button first and wait for the beep before speaking the
“Barge In” commands.
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• “Language German”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect™
phone Voice Training feature may be used.
button, say “System Setup” and once
1. Press the
you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will
train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
uconnect™ phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
117
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seat Adjustment
Move the seat forward or rearward by lifting the lever.
Release the lever when the seat is in the desired position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to make sure that the latch is fully engaged.
Manual Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Only
adjust a seat while the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the
seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat; push
downward on the handle to lower the seat.
119
Front Seatback Recline
Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back to
the desired position and release the handle. Lift the
handle to return the seatback to an upright position.
3
Recline Lever
Seat Height Adjustment
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seatbelt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Front Easy Entry Seats — Two Door Models
Push the lever on the seatback rearward (toward the rear
of the vehicle) to tilt the entire seat forward.
Easy Entry Combination Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
NOTE:
• If equipped with combination lever the seatback will
return to its first locked position. The recliner handle
will have to be actuated to adjust the seatback to the
desired reclined position.
• The front passenger seats have a track memory, which
returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the
track regardless of its original position.
• The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used
during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting
position.
Easy Entry Seat With Combination Lever
1. To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the
seatback upright until it locks.
2. Push the seat rearward until the track locks.
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so
the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
your ear.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the large
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustable Head Restraints
NOTE: The rear head restraints are not adjustable.
To remove the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint to it’s highest position, push in both buttons at
the base of each head restraint rod, and simultaneously
pull up on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
NOTE: Ensure that the front of the head restraint is
facing toward the front of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Removing Head Restraint
Fold and Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Models
To install the head restraint, insert the head restraint rods
into each guide, apply pressure down on the headrest NOTE:
until the head restraint reaches the first lock position, • Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
push the large button in and push down and adjust head
reposition the front seats.
restraint to desired position.
3
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and 2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback
forward.
Folding Rear Seat
3. Return the seat to the normal position.
4. Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and
firmly lock the seat into position.
Rear Seat Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Removing the Rear Seat — Two Door Models
125
1. Remove the three rear subwoofer (if equipped)
mounting nuts using a 15 mm socket.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure that the seats
are fully latched.
3
Subwoofer
2. Unplug the electrical connector from the rear subwoofer (if equipped).
3. Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 through 3
under “Fold and Tumble Rear Seat” in this section.
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Press down on the release bar on each side, and pull Replacing the Rear Seat — Two Door Models
Reverse the steps for removing the seat.
the seat out and away from the lower bracket.
5. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the
rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle.
• The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
Release Bar Location
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door
Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still
maintain some rear seating room.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
NOTE:
To Fold Down the Rear Seat
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to Locate the pull strap (lower outboard side of seat), and
reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
pull it toward you until the seatback releases.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to
fold down easily.
3
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Pull Strap
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise the Rear Seat
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference Release both the hood latches.
from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully
locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the
center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for
use. If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt, make
sure your seatback is fully latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Hood Latch
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the
middle of the hood opening. Push the latch to the left side
of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to push
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
129
down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming
latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood.
and turn signals. The lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood
panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood
slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before
driving.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection,
Multifunction Lever
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Headlights and Parking Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent • Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
for parking lights and instrument panel lights. Turn to
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
the second detent for headlight operation.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
• If the driver’s door is left open, and the headlights or
parking lights are left on, the High Beam Indicator
Light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
131
NOTE:
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows • If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for
more than 1 mile (2 km).
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times the automatically turn off.
Turn Signal Operation
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high
is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s door beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
is opened.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
High/Low Beam Switch
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the
the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
Flash-To-Pass
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parkYou can signal another vehicle with your headlights by ing lights or headlights are on.
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerRotate the center portion upward to the next detent
ing wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights
position to brighten the odometer and radio when the
until the lever is released.
parking lights or headlights are on.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is located on the multifunction lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking or low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
133
Rotate the center portion upward to the last detent to Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the
turn on the interior lighting.
vehicle has been driven approximately 3 ft (1 m). They
will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the
headlights are switched on.
Interior Lights
The overhead light will come on when a door is opened.
It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the
dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward.
The overhead light will automatically turn off in approximately 20 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer
control is left in the dome light position. Turn the ignition
switch ON to restore the overhead light operation.
Dimmer Control
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Lamp
The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
upward detent position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
Also, the rear cargo lamp may be turned on by pressing
either of the switches, located on either side of the lens.
Press a switch a second time to turn the light off.
Cargo Lamp
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the off
detent will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is
also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located at the end of the
lever. For information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in this section.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
135
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for
low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for
high-speed wiper operation.
Front Wiper Control
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause beFront Wiper Control
tween cycles, desirable. Move the lever to the delay
position, then select the delay interval by turning the end Windshield Washers
of the lever. The delay can be regulated between 2 to To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
30 seconds between cycles.
delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for as long as the lever is held plus one wipe
cycle, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As
long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue
to operate.
3
Mist Control
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Pull upwards on
the lever to lock the column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
139
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 35 mph (56 km/h). The
Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side
Electronic Speed Control Lever
of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the Electronic Speed Control system off, push the ON/OFF
button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
off. The Electronic Speed Control system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
To Set a Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward you, or normal brake or
clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate
Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed
memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the
ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME
ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the
RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to
increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever is
released. Release the lever when the desired speed is
reached and the new set speed will be established.
141
increments until the lever is released. Release the lever
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a
1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
Manual Transmission
Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph
Speed Control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the
(1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the Electronic
Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal.
Speed Control lever is tapped, speed increases so that
tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need
to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
speed loss.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the
lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the
set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h)
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
To Accelerate for Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain and/or more
frequent downshifts (auto transmission only) may occur
so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
There are two 12 Volt (DC) auxiliary power outlets that
can provide up to 160 Watts (13 Amps) of current for
accessories designed for use with the standard power
outlet adapters. The power outlet, located in the lower
portion of the instrument panel, has a snap-on plastic cap
so that it can be covered when not in use. When the
optional cigar lighter heating element is used in the
left-side power outlet, it heats when pushed in and pops
out automatically when ready for use. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts The right-side power outlet is powered directly from the
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
Power Outlets
The left-side power outlet is powered when the key is in
the ON or ACC positions.
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
145
Rear Cupholders
The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center
console.
3
Front Cupholders
NOTE: The front cupholder insert is removable for
cleaning.
Rear Cupholders
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Rear Storage Compartment
The rear storage compartment cover is held by a springConsole Storage Compartment
loaded latch. In order to remove the rear storage comTo lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert ignipartment cover, use the following procedure:
tion the key and turn. To open the storage compartment,
press the latch and lift the cover.
NOTE: The rear storage compartment latch should not
be used as cargo tie-down.
1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular (straight
up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees, so it is
parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
Center Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Open the rear compartment cover.
Rear Storage Cover
147
DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you must
remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top
is removed, the pivot brackets must also be removed
from the sport bar. The soft top was installed at the
factory for shipping purposes only. The soft top and the
hard top are to be used independently. Removal is
mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the
soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the
same time for extended periods of time.
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top ThreePiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal”
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
later in this section.
following items:
3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket
• Right and left door frames
screws (two per side) using a #T30 Torx威 head driver.
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-door
models, six for four-door models)
Removing the Soft Top
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
• Two rear window roll up straps
• Two Sunrider威 secure straps (if equipped)
• Two rear swing gate brackets
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
4. Using a rubber mallet, carefully tap the knuckles from 5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the
the left and right metal pivot brackets. Remove the soft pivot brackets. Remove the brackets using a #T30 Torx威
top from the vehicle and store in a clean, dry location.
head driver. Recover and re-zip the sports bar cover.
Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place.
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top Three- 2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top ThreePiece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Installa- Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal”
later in this section.
tion” later in this section.
Installing the Soft Top
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door Frame” in this
section.
NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set
up only. For future soft top procedures, refer to “Soft 4. If the soft top has been removed, follow these steps to
reinstall the soft top. If the soft top is on the vehicle,
Top” in this section.
proceed to step #5.
1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard
a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, unzip the
top removal:
sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the
• Right and left door frames
sports bar with the four screws that were removed
using a #T30 Torx威 head driver. Re-cover and re-zip
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-door
the sport bar covers.
models, six for four-door models)
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
c. Tap the knuckles on the side with a rubber mallet to
reattach them to the metal pivot brackets.
3
b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the
bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the
bows facing upward.
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
d. Screw the pivot screws back into place using a #T30
Torx威 head driver. Secure them until they are snug,
being careful not to cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip the
screws if they are overtightened.
5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for
bottom of rear window) and set aside.
NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is
not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.
6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover
should be discarded. It was intended as a protective
cover for shipping only.
NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual
top wrap.
7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top — Putting Up
the Soft Top” in this section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
• The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage,
etc. Also, it was not designed as a structural
member of the vehicle, and thus cannot properly
carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame and
bodyside, or fully removed.
153
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to panel removal. Removing the top, opening
a door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior.
• The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicles interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicles interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicles interior.
3
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Panel(s) Removal
NOTE: Left panel must be removed before removing
right panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the side.
2. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located on the overhead speaker bar assembly) counterclockwise until they
can be removed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
155
3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from the center 4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above the shoulof the roof panel.
der belt anchorage).
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the Freedom Top™ Storage Bag
Your vehicle comes with a Freedom Top™ storage bag
windshield.
that allows you to store your Freedom Top™ panels. The
storage bag contains two compartments and fits behind
the rear seat.
Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are
facing downward. Unzip the bag and fold back the outer
flap. Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and
fold it back.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom Top™ panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag.
6. Remove the left-hand panel.
To remove the right panel, follow the steps above
except for Step 3.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
157
Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the divider is
latches facing downward.
laying flat). Secure the Velcro, located at the center of the
divider.
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bag with the Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed.
latches facing upward.
NOTE: Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed
prior to inserting the panel into the bag.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
159
Install the seat attachment strap (at the top of the bag) Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and
through the loops.
straps facing the back of the rear seat. Attach the clips at
the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages,
located at the base of the rear seat.
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and Front Panel(s) Installation
loop the strap through the buckle. Pull on the strap to
NOTE: Set the panels on the windshield frame so that
tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat.
there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are
sitting flush with the body.
1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Front Panel(s) Installation with Rear Hard Top
Removed
1. Turn the left and right panels over and move the
spacer block (located on the rear of the panel) upward 90
degrees.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front Panel(s)
Removal” in this section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx威 head screws that secure the
hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the door) using a
#40 Torx威 head driver (Four–Door Only).
NOTE: The front panel(s) must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Set the panels on the windshield frame 4. Remove the six Torx威 head screws that secure the hard
so that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside) using a
panels are sitting flush with the body.
#40 Torx威 head driver.
3
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of 6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of
the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.
the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Release the red locking tab by pushing upward.
163
8. To remove the wiring harness press the side tab and
pull to disconnect.
3
NOTE: If necessary, pliers can be used to lightly squeeze
grips while disconnecting the washer hose.
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the grips on hose Rear Hard Top Installation
connector and pull.
NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top
usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the
hard top.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if
necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal
in reverse order.
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body
at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform
gap between the lift glass and hard top.
10. Close the swing gate.
11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place the hard
top on a soft surface to prevent damage.
NOTE: It is not necessary to pinch connection when
reinstalling washer hose. Push on until click is heard.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR FRAME
165
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door
frame(s) removed as you will lose the protection that
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use
during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew:
• Opening a door or lowering a window while the
top is wet may allow water to drip into the
vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
door frame(s) may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Frame Removal — Two-Door Models
1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment
knobs (two per side).
WARNING!
Use both hands to remove the door frames. The door
frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands
are not used.
2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the
front of the door frame.
3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to
remove the frame from the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
167
3
4. Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for
storage. Store in a secure location.
WARNING!
Never store the door frames in your vehicle. In an
event of an accident, a loose door frame many cause
personal injury. If removed, always store the door
frames outside of the vehicle.
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models
1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews.
3. After the door frame pin has been set into the body
side hole, carefully set the front of the door frame into the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body
4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip it over
side, behind the door opening.
the metal side bar and then clip the rear, making sure that
the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the
door frame.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
169
5. Starting with the front knob, screw in and tighten both
knobs. Repeat on the other side.
3
WARNING!
Door Frame Removal — Four-Door Models
1. Unscrew and remove the two forward most door
frame attachment knobs.
Use both hands to remove the door frames. The door
frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands
are not used.
170
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the 4. Unscrew and remove the remaining door frame atupper front of the front door frame.
tachment knob on the rear door frame.
3. Pull the frame toward you with your front hand to
remove the frame from the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
171
5. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the
upper front of the rear door frame. Pull the frame toward
you with your rear hand to remove the frame from the
vehicle.
3
WARNING!
6. Screw the knob back into the door frame and fold for
storage. Store in a secure location.
Never store the door frames in your vehicle. In an
event of an accident, a loose door frame many cause
personal injury. If removed, always store the door
frames outside of the vehicle.
172
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Position the top of the door frame against the metal
sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to
1. Install the rear door frame first.
pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the
side, just behind the rear door opening.
rear door.
Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models
4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to hold the
door rail in position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield. Then, clip the
front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that
the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the
door frame. Position the rear of the front door frame to
lay on top of the front of the rear door frame.
173
6. Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front
knob (long knob). Then, install the middle knob (short
knob) through the front and rear door frames and screw
into the top of the B-pillar.
7. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most knob, and
then the middle knob. Repeat this procedure for the other
side.
3
174
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SOFT TOP — TWO DOOR MODELS
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
Please visit the owners section of Jeep.com for instruc- fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
tional videos.
the top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F
(5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top down or
CAUTION!
roll the rear or side curtains.
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural member of the
vehicle and, thus, cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.
CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax build up may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
175
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models”
in Section 7 of this manual. It contains important
information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
rely on them to contain occupants within the
vehicle or to protect against injury during an
accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also removed. Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the
vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
3
176
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Quick Steps to Lowering the Soft Top
Refer to “Lowering the Soft Top” in this section for
further details.
1. Remove the side and back windows.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
177
3. Release the Sunrider威 latch (both sides).
3
178
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
NOTE: Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the
vehicle.
Quick Steps to Raising the Soft Top
Refer to “Raising the Soft Top” in this section for further
details.
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider威 latches (another person may be needed to help
with this operation).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
179
2. Engage header latches.
3
180
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Install rear corner panels.
4. Install side and back windows.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
181
Lowering The Soft Top
3
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
Sail Panel
Body Side Retainer
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Quarter Window
Check Strap
Front Retainer — Quarter Window
Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
182
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
183
NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to 3. Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft loops on the windshield.
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust,
etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow the half-door windows carefully outside of
the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
4. Open the swing gate.
3
184
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in
(7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove the
swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the
swing gate brackets.
• Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower
corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the
top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls
will stay on the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on the top
cover. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
185
6. Undo the Velcro威 that runs along the top and rear 9. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body
edge of the side window.
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
7. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
unzip the window.
3
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
8. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat this
step on the opposite side.
186
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
10. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so 11. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed
that they rest on top of the soft top.
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket forward
while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle
to disengage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
187
12. Completely release the latches from the loops on the 13. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over
windshield frame. If your vehicle is not equipped with the Sunrider威 link (Sunrider威 Models only).
the Sunrider威 package, proceed to Step 15.
3
188
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
14. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails (Sun- NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.
rider威 Models only).
15. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to
prevent possible damage to the rear center high-mounted
brake light. Move to the front of the vehicle. Grasp the
side bow behind the header and lift the top, folding it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
189
16. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the Raising the Soft Top
bows and as far inward as possible. This will keep any
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle.
2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door Frame”
in this section.
3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider威 link
(Sunrider威 Models only).
17. Close the front header latches.
18. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section.
3
190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the 5. Make sure the Sunrider威 bracket on the side bows
side bow and the 2–bow (middle bow) up and over the latches to the door rails (Sunrider威 Models only).
sports bar until the header rests on the top of the
windshield frame.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
191
6. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each 7. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the latches). by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior
side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and
over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of
the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only be
clipped to the shortened rail edge.
3
192
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail 9. Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body
panels over the rear roof bow.
side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the rear
window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear
roof bow (3–bow) will aid to reach the channel with the
retainers.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
193
10. To install the side windows, affix the window tem- 11. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
porarily by attaching to the Velcro威 in the rear corner. channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
Start the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).
properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so
can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
window.
3
194
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro威
along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this step for
the opposite side.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
12. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
195
13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down and
pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed.
3
196
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
14. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening.
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned
before zipping to prevent damage.
15. Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the
window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
197
16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the 18. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
swing gate brackets.
their secured position.
3
17. Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the
rear soft top bow (3–bow), then complete attaching the
sail panel retainers into the body side channel.
198
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SOFT TOP (FOUR-DOOR MODELS)
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top
Please visit the owner’s section of Jeep.com for instruc- fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
tional videos.
the top can then be snapped into place. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top
CAUTION!
down or roll the rear or side curtains.
The soft top is not designed to carry any additional
loads such as roof racks, spare tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural member of the
vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or the top
has been folded down for a period of time, the top will
appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it
difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction
of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.
CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car
wash. Window scratches and wax buildup may
result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature is
below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top may result.
• Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty.
Grit may scratch the window.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has been
either fully attached to the windshield frame, or
fully lowered.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
199
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not lower the top with the windows installed.
Window and top damage may occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models”
in Section 7 of this manual. It contains important
information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to pry or
force any of the clamps, clips, or retainers securing
the soft top. Do not force or pry the soft top
framework when opening or closing. Damage to
the top may result.
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window
curtain up unless the side curtains are also open.
Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could
enter the vehicle.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed
only for protection against the elements. Do not
rely on them to contain occupants within the
vehicle or to protect against injury during an
accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
3
200
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft top may
damage the seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure
sealing. Improper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: Do not remove any of the three attachment
knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Quick Steps for Lowering the Soft Top
201
2. Release header latches from the windshield frame.
1. Remove the side and back windows.
3
202
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to the rear.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
203
4. Release Sunrider威 latch (both sides).
3
5. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
NOTE: Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of
the vehicle.
204
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Quick Steps for Raising the Soft Top
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top, engaging the
Sunrider威 latches (another person may be needed to help
with this operation).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Install rear corner panels.
205
3. Rotate the header forward.
3
206
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Engage the header latches.
5. Install the side and back windows.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
207
Folding Down The Soft Top
3
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
4–Bow
Sail Panel
6 — Body Side Retainer
7 — Quarter Window
8 — Check Strap
9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
208
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
209
NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to 3. Release the header latches and hooks from the loops
assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft on the windshield frame.
top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust,
etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small
brush. Cleaning products are available through your
authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each half-door
window by opening the door and lifting the half-door
window out.
NOTE: Stow half-door windows carefully outside of the
vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3
210
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Open the swing gate.
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in
(7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove the
swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the
swing gate brackets.
• Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower
corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the
top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls
will stay on the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on the top
cover. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
211
6. Undo the Velcro威 that runs along the top and rear 9. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body
edge of the side window.
side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.
7. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely
unzip the window.
3
NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
8. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers
from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat this
step on the opposite side.
212
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
10. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft 11. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed
top.
unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the
swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket forward
while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle
to disengage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
213
12. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift 13. Fold back the front section of the top, pulling the
the top.
fabric rearward. Gently rest the header on top of the rear
portion of the deck.
3
214
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
14. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙ as 15. Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch
shown. Enter the vehicle and move the material into two above the front of the rear door. Push the top rearward to
folds.
disengage. Repeat this step on the other side.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
215
16. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operaprevent possible damage to the rear center high-mounted tion.
brake light. Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top
along the door frame track to the rear door frame.
3
18. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the
bows as far inside as possible. This will keep any portion
17. Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle.
and lower the top down into the vehicle.
216
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
19. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro威 straps 20. Close the front header latches.
provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the
21. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to “Door
strap around the side bows and through the slot on the
Frame” in this section.
body.
Putting Up The Soft Top
NOTE: Be extremely careful when putting up the soft
top to prevent the doors from getting scratched. It may be
helpful to open the rear doors.
1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section.
2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down
position and store in secure location.
3. Open the swing gate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
217
4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the 5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door
rear door frames.
frame tracks and slide the top forward.
NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.
3
218
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider威 locking 8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the
mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear side bow until it rests on the windshield frame.
doors.
7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
219
9. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each 10. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them
side onto the windshield loops (do not close the latches). by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior
side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and
over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of
the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only be
clipped to the shortened rail edge.
3
220
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
11. Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side
pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow (4–bow).
channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the rear
window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear
roof bow (4–bow) will aid in reaching the channel with
the retainers.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
221
12. To install the side windows, affix the window tem- 13. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door
porarily by attaching it to the Velcro威 in the upper rear channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and
corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm). properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so
can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the
window.
3
222
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
14. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the
window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the
front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by
closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro威
along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this step for
the opposite side.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
223
15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate
bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear
window. The spongy part of the seal should be down and
pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed.
3
224
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
16. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends 17. Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of
at the lower left corner of the rear window opening. the window.
Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned
18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the
before zipping to prevent damage.
swing gate brackets.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
225
19. Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert- SUNRIDER姞 (TWO-DOOR MODELS) — IF
ing the rest of the retainer into the body channel.
EQUIPPED
20. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to
their secured position.
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider威 feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.
3
226
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening the Sunrider姞
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.
3. Slide the plastic sleeve forward.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
227
4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Make sure the 5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows. Wrap the
material is folded back as shown.
straps around the bows as shown. Repeat on the other
side.
NOTE: The Sunrider威 latch on the door rail should not
be activated for Sunrider威 use. If activated, the soft top
must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels.
6. Reposition the sun visors.
3
228
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing the Sunrider姞
1. Remove the straps from the side bows.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the
vehicle.
SUNRIDER姞 (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) — IF
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a
window while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the windshield frame, close latches, and return the sun visors to
NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph
their original positions.
(64 km/h) with the Sunrider威 feature open, it is recom5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider威 mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.
link.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening the Sunrider姞
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
229
3. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift
the top.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the
windshield frame.
3
230
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest 5. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙ as shown.
the header on top of the rear portion of the deck.
Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
231
6. Secure the top by using the two provided straps. Each FOLDING WINDSHIELD
strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro威 to itself; The fold-down windshield and removable side bars on
your vehicle are structural elements that can provide
use one strap on each side of the vehicle.
some protection in some accidents. The windshield also
provides some protection against weather, road debris
and intrusion of small branches and other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield
down and the side bars removed as you lose the protection these structural elements can provide.
Closing the Sunrider姞
Perform the above steps in the opposite order.
NOTE: Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the
material to sag and may block the rearview mirror.
If required for certain off-road uses, the side bars can be
removed and the windshield folded down. However, the
protection afforded by these features is then lost. If you
remove the side bars and fold down the windshield,
drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the
speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with
low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road
with the windshield folded down.
3
232
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as
the task that required their removal is completed and
before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your
passenger should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and
off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised
or folded down.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If
you choose to remove the doors, see your authorized
dealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror.
Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for
on-road use.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal injury:
• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is
securely fastened, either up or down.
• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be worn at
all times when the windshield is down.
• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions
for raising the windshield. Make sure that the
folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars,
and all associated hardware and fasteners are
correctly and tightly assembled before driving
your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions
may prevent your vehicle from providing you and
your passengers protection in some accidents.
• If you remove the doors, store them outside the
vehicle. In the event of an accident, a loose door
may cause personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
233
Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side
Bars
1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following
the instructions in this manual.
NOTE: To assist in properly reinstalling side bars, mark
the original locations prior to removing.
3
2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and the one
side hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the trim (Do not
remove plastic corner trim, sun visor bolts, or sport bar
covering).
3. Open the sport bar Velcro covering.
4. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the
plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar, one hex
bolt (13 mm) on the side of the side bar, and one hex bolt
(13 mm) on top of the side bar.
234
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pull side bar out horizontally when removing.
NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
5. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattach the sport
bar Velcro威 covering.
6. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, use four
cinch straps (available from your authorized dealer).
Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor
behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin
cover.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not remove the head impact foam from the side
bars, as damage to the foam may result.
You or others could be injured if you carry the side
bars loose in your vehicle. Remove the side bars from
the vehicle or securely store them as described or
they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs.
See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
235
7. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling
the wiper away from the windshield and out to the
“lock” position. Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps, and
remove the retaining nuts. Lift the wiper arms off and
store them in the center console or securely behind the
rear seat.
3
NOTE: It may be necessary to use a battery terminal
puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the
shaft after the nuts have been removed.
8. Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the
six black round-headed Torx威 head screws (using a #40
Torx威 head driver) on each side of the base of the 9. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the
rubber hood bumpers.
windshield.
10. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap
through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and
on the center of the windshield frame. Tighten the strap
to secure the windshield in place.
236
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Raising the Windshield and Replacing Side Bars
1. Raise the windshield.
2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar.
Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Windshield And Removing
Side Bars” earlier in this section.
• Reattach the sport bar Velcro威 covering.
3. Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield
frame.
• Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first, then the
lower side hex bolt (13 mm). The lower side bolt will
not align until the top two bolts are installed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.
237
REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY
5. Install the lower windshield plates with the six black Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
round-headed Torx威 head screws (using a #40 Torx威 head A rotary ring switch on the control lever (located on the
right side of the steering column) controls the operation
driver) on each side of the base of the windshield.
of the rear wiper/washer function.
6. Reinstall the wiper arms.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
3
238
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the switch upward to the “On” position will Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The rear window defroster button is located on the
activate the rear wiper.
bottom right-side of the blower control knob.
Rotate the switch upward to the “washer” position
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster.
will activate that rear washer. The washer pump
An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
is engaged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle three
automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes.
times before returning to the set position.
For an additional five minutes of operation, press the
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned button a second time.
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
239
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
䡵 Compass And Trip Computer
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Compass Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 262
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX
Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 266
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 273
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 275
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Sales Code (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD
Radio – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 292
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 302
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 283
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 302
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios
Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 291
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Selecting uconnect™ studios (Satellite)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect™ studios
(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance
243
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 309
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Manual Heater Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Horn
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
6
7
8
9
— Climate Controls
— Power Outlet
— Lower Switch Bank
— Auxiliary Power Outlet / Cigar Lighter
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
245
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank.
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the
Procedures” in section 6 of this manual.
fuel gauge, voltmeter, oil pressure and temperature
gauges may not show accurate readings. When the 3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
engine is not running, turn the ignition switch to ON to
lights are on.
obtain accurate readings.
2. Charging System Light
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical chargWhen the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal
ing system. The light should come on when the
(10.6L) this light will turn on and a single chime
ignition switch is first turned ON, and remain on briefly
will sound.
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
5. Speedometer
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
Indicates vehicle speed.
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
247
is started, if the bulb does not come on, have the system
6. Front Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
Indicates when the front axle lock has been checked by an authorized dealer. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
activated.
soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
A warning chime and an indicator light will alert
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
you to buckle the seat belts. When the belt is
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
buckled, the chime will stop, but the light will stay
10. High Beam Indicator
on for about six seconds, until it times out.
This indicator shows that the high beam head8. Turn Signal Indicators
lights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam.
when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will
Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back
chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile
to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the
(1.6 km).
headlights or park lights are left on, the high beam
indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The sound.
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
4
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
249
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate
function check at vehicle start-up. If the light remains on
after start-up or comes on and stays on at road speeds, it
may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or
has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard
non-anti-lock brakes.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi- Light are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this manual.
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. Airbag Warning Light
16. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This indicator lights and remains lit for six to
This light warns of an overheated engine condieight seconds when the ignition is first turned
tion. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
on. If the light does not come on for six to eight
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the
seconds, stays on or comes on while driving, engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer.
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
14. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxiThis light indicates when the rear axle lock has
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
been activated.
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
18. Temperature Gauge
15. Tachometer
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaIndicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
(RPM).
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer in the red area. Engine damage will occur.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
251
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized dealership for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
19. Cruise Indicator
This indicator shows when the electronic speed
control system is turned on.
20. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO”
display. Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip
odometer mode. Press and hold the button for two
seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
22. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
23. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
253
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
24. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip
mileage. Refer to “Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO
(Fuel Saver Indicator) Button” for additional information.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator
ECO-ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator On
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
HOTOIL . . . . . . Transaxle Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe
Threshold
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
ESPOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESP Deactivated
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or ECO / ECO-ON (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
must be reset at zero.
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
255
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
button to change the display from odometer to either of
the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” display.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
LoW tirE
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
the vehicle is started.
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
HOTOIL
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
When this message is displayed there is a transaxle
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odomover-temperature condition. When this condition occurs,
eter display area. For more information on fuses and fuse
the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odomlocations refer to “Fuses” in Section 7.
eter along with a chime.
CHAngE OIL Message
NOTE: When this message is displayed, bring the
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
vehicle to a stop and idle the engine until the message
indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
clears.
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
4
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of
an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does
not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have
the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not poor quality fuel, etc. may illuminate the light after
start the engine).
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
times within 10 seconds.
require towing.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
257
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
26. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Malfunction
Indicator Light — If Equipped
The ⬙ESC Malfunction Indicator Light⬙ located
in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ⬙ESC Malfunction Indicator Light⬙ also flashes when TCS is active. If the ⬙ESC
4
258
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Malfunction Indicator Light⬙ begins to flash during ac- 27. O/D (Overdrive) Off Indicator Light
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
This light will illuminate when the O/D OFF
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
button has been selected and overdrive has been
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
turned off. The O/D OFF button is located on the center
console.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESCequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
28. Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
sway bar is disconnected.
29. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
System (BAS) Warning Light
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake
Assist System (BAS) warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. The light
should go out with the engine running. If the ESP/BAS
warning light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESP or the BAS system. If this light stays illuminated,
have the ESP and BAS checked at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in Section 5 for more information.
WARNING!
If a warning light remains on the system may not be
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
account for the lack of the feature, may be in accident.
30. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash
259
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the
ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK
position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on
with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
31. Compass / Mini-Trip Computer Display — If
Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Mini-Trip Computer messages. Refer to “MiniTrip Computer” later in this section.
32. Compass / Mini-Trip Computer Button—If
Equipped
Press this button to switch between the different
functions.
COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER — IF
EQUIPPED
Compass/Trip Computer Display
The Compass/Trip Computer is located in the instruControl
Buttons
ment cluster. It features a driver-interactive display (displays information such as outside temperature, compass Press and release the left button (on the instrument
cluster) to access the computer displays.
direction, and trip information).
Press and hold the left button (on the instrument cluster)
for two to three seconds to switch from English to Metric
displays.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
261
Reset / Change Display
Elapsed Time (ET)
Press and hold the left button (on the instrument cluster) This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
while function is being displayed to reset or change the since the last reset.
display.
Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
— If Equipped
The following trip displays can be reset or changed:
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
• AVG ECO (changes to present fuel economy)
reset. Press and release the right button (on the instru• ET (will reset display)
ment cluster) to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip
B, or to ECO. Press and hold the right button while the
Trip Conditions
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Trip A
This display shows the average fuel economy.
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
Estimated Range (DTE)
reset.
This display shows the estimated distance that can be
Trip B
traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estiShows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
mated distance is based on the most recent trip informareset.
tion: (Average Fuel Economy) x (Fuel Remaining).
This display cannot be reset.
4
262
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage.
Compass Calibration
The compass on your vehicle will automatically calibrate
when new, and will continuously adjust itself over the
life of the vehicle. If the CAL indicator is on (or flashing),
drive slowly (under 10 MPH [16 kmh]) in an open area
until the CAL indicator is off.
Compass Temperature Display
NOTE:
This display provides the outside temperature and one of • A good calibration requires a level surface and an
eight compass readings to indicate the direction the
environment free from large metallic objects such as
vehicle is facing.
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or property damage.
• Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cell
phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located
and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Compass Calibration
The self-calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions.
During a short initial period, the compass may appear
erratic and the CAL symbol will appear (blinking) on the
display. After the vehicle has completed at least one
complete circle under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free
from large metal objects, calibration will be complete
when the CAL symbol is extinguished.
263
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. First enter the variance mode. Press and hold the left
button (located on the instrument cluster) for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode, and
release the button when the VAR (Compass Variance)
symbol appears.
After initial calibration, the compass will continue to
2. The current variance value will also be displayed.
automatically update this calibration whenever the veOnce in the variance mode, it is necessary to release the
hicle is in motion.
button, and then press and hold it again (approximately
10 seconds) until CAL is displayed (solid, not blinking).
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: Before attempting a manual compass calibra- 3. Manual compass calibration has been initiated. Drive
tion, the engine must be running and the transmission the vehicle slowly in one or more circles under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from large metal objects until the
in the PARK position (if equipped).
CAL symbol is extinguished.
4
264
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the variance mode and release the button when the VAR
symbol appears. The current variance value will also be
displayed. To change the zone, press the left button once
to increment the zone. The default is Zone 8. After Zone
15, the values will wrap around to Zone 1. When the
correct zone is displayed (per the Compass Variance
Zone Map) for the zone that the vehicle is located in, wait
Compass Variance (VAR)
for about five seconds; then the trip computer will store
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
the variance value in memory and the compass will
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accuresume normal operation.
racy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle NOTE: The U.S./Metric display will change from Enwill be driven. When properly set, the compass will glish to Metric or Metric to English before the VAR
symbol appears, however, it will revert back to its
automatically account for this difference.
original setting after programming the compass funcSetting the Compass Variance
tions.
Refer to the variance map for the correct compass variance zone. To check the variance zone, the ignition must
be ON. Press and hold the left button (located on the
instrument cluster) for approximately 10 seconds to enter
When the CAL symbol is no longer displayed, the
compass is calibrated and should display correct headings. Verify proper calibration by checking North (N),
South (S), East (E), and West (W). If the compass does not
appear accurate, repeat the calibration procedure in another area.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
265
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
4
Compass Variance Map
Outside Temperature
If the outside temperature is more than 131°F (55°C), the
display will show 131°F (55°C). When the outside temperature is less than ⫺40°F (⫺40°C), the display will
show ⫺40°F (⫺40°C).
REQ Radio
266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
time to turn off the radio.
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
Electronic Volume Control
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — If
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
Equipped
volume and to the left decreases it.
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be (if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
set at the same volume level as last played.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
SEEK Buttons
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
267
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
Phone Button uconnect™ phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3. knob to save the time change.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time step 2.
and frequency display.
INFO Button
Clock Setting Procedure
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
RW/FF
SCROLL control knob.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
will begin to blink.
4
268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
MUSIC TYPE Button
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mid-range tones.
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL seconds will allow the program format type to be secontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Program Type
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
269
16-Digit Character Display
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
4
270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
will display the following:
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
SETUP Button
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
available on the disc (if equipped).
the following items:
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
the disc) (if equipped).
select an entry and make changes.
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
equipped).
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
271
NOTE:
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
• The available selections for each of the above entries
user to scroll through the following items and set
varies depending upon the disc.
defaults according to customer preference.
• These selections can only be made while playing a Menu Language — If Equipped
DVD.
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
OFF (if equipped).
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
equipped).
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the number and then push to select.
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
Audio Language — If Equipped
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows language (effective only if the language is supported by
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save to select the number and then push to select.
changes.
4
272
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
Subtitles — If Equipped
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
Off or On.
customer-preferred settings.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio AM and FM Buttons
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
273
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
button number will display.
of the player a maximum of five times.
4
274
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
position to operate the radio.
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
275
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
works in a similar manner.
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
CD currently playing.
following restrictions.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
4
276
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
character extension)
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
character extension)
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
277
frequencies in the following table are supported. In ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate supported by the radios.
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
MPEG SpecifiSampling Fresupported.
Bit Rate (kbps)
cation
quency (kHz)
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
320, 256, 224,
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
MPEG-1 Audio
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
56, 48
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
Layer 3
56, 48
affected by the following:
WMA Specifica- Sampling Fre• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
Bit Rate (kbps)
tion
quency (kHz)
CD-R media
48, 64, 96, 128,
WMA
44.1 and 48
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
160, 192 VBR
to load than non-multisession discs
4
278
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
increase with more files and folders
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
279
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
display for five seconds.
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume No function.
down.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
For uconnect™ “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
4
280
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in this engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
section.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital TheOperating Instructions - Video Entertainment
ater Systems, Inc.
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
SALES CODE (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD
Guide.”
RADIO – IF EQUIPPED
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories. NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of of the unit’s faceplate.
Dolby威 Laboratories.
The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol- Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec- for easy menu selection.
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is (GPS)-based Navigation system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
281
Refer to your uconnect™ tunes (REN) or (RER) user’s To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
manual for detailed operating instructions.
1. Turn on the radio.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The
Section 3.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
uconnect™ gps — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
4
282
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where 1. Turn on the radio.
the word “Save” is displayed.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
current setting:
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
1. Turn on the radio.
Changing the Time Zone
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
1. Turn on the radio.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis- 3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
played to change the current setting.
the screen.
Show Time if Radio is Off
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
When selected, this feature will display the time of day selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
as follows to change the current setting:
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
283
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed. Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
side of the radio faceplate.
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
4
284
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
SCROLL control knob.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
285
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
4
286
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
287
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
CAUTION!
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
away and jam the player mechanism.
SEEK Button
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
a second CD if one is already loaded.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
can cause damage to the player.
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
4
288
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
RW/FF
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD file recording media and formats are limited. When
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricRW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) tions.
button works in a similar manner.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
AM/FM Button
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
289
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•
•
4
290
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playback of MP3 Files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
VBR bit rate.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
MPEG SpecifiSampling FreBit Rate (kbps)
time to start playing the MP3 files.
cation
quency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
MPEG-1 Audio
192, 160, 128,
by the following:
48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
56, 48, 40, 32
CD-R media
160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
112, 96, 80, 64,
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
Layer 3
to load than non-multisession discs
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
supported.
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
291
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
RES/RSC Radio
292
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — If
time to turn off the radio.
Equipped
Electronic Volume Control
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
volume and to the left decreases it.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
Phone Button uconnect™ phone — If Equipped
set at the same volume level as last played.
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
SEEK Buttons
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
293
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
and radio frequency.
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
Clock Setting Procedure
procedure, starting at Step 2.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
INFO Button
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
will begin to blink.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
AM or FM frequencies.
knob to save time change.
4
294
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise sound level from the right or left side speakers.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
MUSIC TYPE Button
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mid-range tones.
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL seconds will allow the program format type to be secontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ format types:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
Program Type
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
295
16-Digit Character Display
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
4
296
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
station with the same selected Music Type name. The AM/FM Button
Music Type function only operates when in the FM Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Memory
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SETUP Button
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the be stored into pushbutton memory.
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
to save time change.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
297
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
pressing the pushbutton twice.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
button number will display.
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Buttons 1 - 6
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
stations).
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
DISC/AUX Button
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
MP3 Audio Play
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
4
298
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
299
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanThe radio uses the following limits for file systems:
dom Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
4
300
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
display.)
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
301
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
302
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
303
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The limited coverage in Alaska.
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
System Activation
ignition is OFF).
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone (If
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
Equipped)
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welOperating Instructions - uconnect™ studios
come kit that contains general information, including
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in this information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
section.
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
uconnect™ studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
4
304
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting uconnect™ studios (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
faceplate.
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
305
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not Operating Instructions — uconnect™ studios
place items directly on or above the antenna.
(Satellite) Mode
Reception Quality
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the position to operate the radio.
following reasons:
SEEK Buttons
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
structure or under a physical obstacle.
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
form of short audio mutes.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can without stopping until you release it.
cause intermittent reception.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause signal blockage.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
4
306
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to
normal display).
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
INFO Button — REU Radio
seconds will allow the program format type to be sePressing the INFO button will display information about lected.
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
type.
RW/FF
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
direction of the arrows.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
307
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
SETUP Button
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
following items:
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.
4
308
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
button number will display.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratchButtons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you ing the disc.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone (If
Equipped)
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™ too high.
Guide.”
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
precautions:
good disc before considering disc player service.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Heater Only
The controls for the heating/ventilation system in this
vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort
controls can be set to obtain the desired interior conditions.
309
Climate Controls
310
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
The mode control allows you comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
to choose from several patFloor
terns of air distribution as
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
identified by the symbols.
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the windshield and side
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
and side window defrosting.
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blower Control
Use this control (center rotary knob) to regulate the
amount of air forced through the system in any mode
you select. The fan speed increases as you move the
control to the right from the OFF position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
311
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System — If
Equipped
The controls for the heating/air conditioning and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
interior conditions.
4
Temperature Control
Use this control (right rotary knob) to regulate the
temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures
while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
Climate Controls
312
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The instrument panel features four airflow registers. Two Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
panel and two are located in the center of the instrument
panel. These registers can be closed to partially block
Bi-Level
airflow, and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
the occupant desires.
Mode Control
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
The mode control allows you upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
to choose from several pat- air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
terns of air distribution as comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
identified by the symbols.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
313
Blower Control
Use this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select.
The fan speed increases as you
move the control to the right from
the OFF position.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best windshield Temperature Control
and side window defrosting.
Use this control to regulate the
temperature of the air inside the
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
passenger compartment. The blue
both Mix and Defrost even if the fan switch is not in the
area of the scale indicates cooler
A/C position. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
temperatures while the red area
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
indicates warmer temperatures.
only when necessary.
4
314
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
NOTE: Continuous use of the “Recirculation” mode
may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the “Recirculation”
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of
moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum defogging, select the Outside Air position.
Recirculation Control
NOTE: The “Recirculation” mode will not operate in the
Press this button to choose befloor, mix or defrost modes.
tween outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A light will illuminate when
you are in “Recirculation” mode.
Only use the “Recirculation”
mode to temporarily block out
any outside odors, smoke, or dust
and to cool the interior rapidly
upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning
Normal Operation
315
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, select either the Panel or Bi-Level position
using the mode control. Then,
press the “A/C” and the “Recirculation” buttons so that both
lights are illuminated, and set the
temperature control to its coolest
setting.
Press this button to engage the air
conditioning. A light will illuminate when the air conditioning
system is engaged. Once the air
conditioning is engaged, use a
combination of the mode control,
fan speed control, and temperature control to achieve your de- NOTE:
sired interior temperature.
• Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix or
defrost modes.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds. • Refer to “Recirculation Control” in this section, for
proper or extended use of this position.
4
316
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher
blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended. Refer to Fluids and
Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
NEUTRAL (N) and depress the accelerator slightly for
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other
obstructions.
317
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
䡵 Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Reverse Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
–29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
䡵 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 331
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 332
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
5
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Automatic Transmission With Overdrive . . . . 333
▫ Side Step Removal — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 346
䡵 Four–Wheel Drive Operation (Command-Trac I威
Or Rock-Trac威) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ The Basics Of Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Operating Instructions/Precautions . . . . . . . 337
▫ When To Use 4L (Low) Range . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . 348
䡵 Trac-Lok威 Rear Axle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
䡵 Axle Lock (Tru–Lok威) — Rubicon Models . . . . 342
䡵 Rear Axle Lock (Four-Wheel Drive
Non-Rubicon Models) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 䡵 Tires — General Information
321
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation . . . 390
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 382 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 395
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 402
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 407
䡵 Vehicle Loading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . 417
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome,
Etc.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . 425
▫ Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . 425
STARTING AND OPERATING
323
STARTING PROCEDURES
enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal.
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
The “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when the
transfer case has been shifted into this mode.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Manual Transmission
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature Starting” procedure.
5
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transmission Only
If Engine Fails to Start
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
WARNING!
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will continue to run, but will automatically disengage
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
itself when the engine is running. If the engine fails to
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 secstart the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
onds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
causing serious personal injury.
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
(Continued)
Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally-powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and, once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 of
this manual for proper jump starting procedures
and follow them carefully.
Without Tip Start — Manual Transmission Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
325
the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the
engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
5
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15–
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
With Tip Start — Automatic Transmission Only
After Starting
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procewarms up.
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
WARNING!
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor Do not leave children or animals inside parked
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition cause serious injury or death.
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
327
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
WARNING!
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
You or others could be injured if you leave the
grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block
vehicle unattended without having the parking
heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of
brake fully applied. The parking brake should althe battery tray.
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could
cause electrocution.
Use the heater when temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) are
expected to last for several days.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- Shifting
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
warms up. This is normal.
pedal.
You should always use 1st gear when starting from a
standing position if under heavy load or when pulling a
trailer.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Shift Pattern
STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
EnSpeeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
gine
3.8L
Accel. 15 (24)
24
34
47
56
(39)
(55)
(76)
(90)
Cruise 10 (16)
19
27
37
41
(31)
(43)
(60)
(66)
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
329
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause valve damage, and/or clutch disc
damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
5
330
STARTING AND OPERATING
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH
(KM/H)
Gear
Selec6 to 5
5 to 4
4 to 3
3 to 2 2 to 1
tion
Maxi80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
mum
Speed
Reverse Shifting
To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a complete
stop. Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear
train to stop rotating. Beginning from the NEUTRAL
position, move the shift lever in one quick, smooth
motion straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter passes the
“knock-over”). Complete the shift by pulling the shift
lever into REVERSE.
The “knock-over” prevents the driver from accidentally
entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver
that they are about to shift the transmission into REVERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to REVERSE can
be perceived as a high shift effort.
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
331
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever
is locked in PARK.
5
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
3. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully remove the
shift lock manual override cover which is located on the
PRNDL bezel, above the PARK position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override
opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual
override. The manual override may be used in the event
that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with
the key in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed.
To operate the shift lock manual override, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the
engine.
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
STARTING AND OPERATING
333
6. Press the shifter release button and shift into NEUTRAL.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized
dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used.
Automatic Transmission with Overdrive
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE (or from P or
R to D) should be done only after the accelerator pedal is
released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your
foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between
these gears.
5
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-10°F (-23°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
lever in the PARK position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
the idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro(Continued) longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Towing, coasting, or driving the vehicle for any
other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
335
heavy load conditions (for example, in hilly terrain,
strong head winds, or trailer towing), turning off overdrive will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission overheats, a “HOTOIL” message will
be displayed in the odometer and a chime will sound.
OVERDRIVE
This range is used for most city and highway driving.
The transmission contains an electronically-controlled
fourth gear Overdrive, and will automatically shift from
DRIVE to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are
present:
• The shift lever is in DRIVE.
• The O/D OFF switch has not been activated.
• Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
(48 km/h).
When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using
Overdrive, such as when operating the vehicle under
Overdrive Off Switch
5
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O/D OFF stays in low gear with no upshift. This gear provides
switch located on the center console. The “O/D OFF engine compression braking at low speeds.
Indicator Light” (on the switch) will illuminate to show
CAUTION!
that the switch has been activated. When the indicator
light is on, Overdrive is locked out. Pressing the switch a
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
second time restores the Overdrive function. The lockout
must turn the ignition from LOCK so the steering
feature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a
wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise,
heavy load.
damage to the steering column or shift lever could
2 (Second)
result.
This range is used for moderate grades and to assist • Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow. The
vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
vehicle begins from a stop in low gear with automatic
incline without applying the brakes. These pracupshift to second gear. The vehicle will not shift into
tices can overheat and damage the transmission.
third gear.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
1 (First)
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud,
damage may result.
sand, snow, or on steep grades. The vehicle begins and
STARTING AND OPERATING
337
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high
gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMANDTRAC I姞 OR ROCK-TRAC姞) — IF EQUIPPED
Operating Instructions/Precautions
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• 2H (Two-wheel drive high range)
• 4H (Four-wheel drive high range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-wheel drive low range)
5
Four-Wheel Drive Shift Controls
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the
front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these
positions. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal
driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hardsurfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage
to the driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will
be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon
models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cause damage to the transfer case.
cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
together. The light will illuminate when the transfer case
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
is shifted into the 4H position.
NOTE: Do not attempt to shift when only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer, and the front and rear
driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place.
Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshaft from
the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
339
4H Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range (4H) provides additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces and should not be used on
wet or dry pavement.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
N (Neutral) Position
This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind
Shift Positions
another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in SecFor additional information on the appropriate use of each
tion 5 of this manual.
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
4L Position
2H Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together,
This range is used for normal street and highway driving
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
on hard-surfaced roads.
5
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
speed. This range (4L) provides additional traction and 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument
vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not
into the 4L position.
pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral).
Shifting Procedure
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
2H to 4H or 4H to 2H
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may ocShifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignshifts can be made up to 50 mph (80 km/h). With the ment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/ method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera- 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
5 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Failure to engage a position completely can cause
transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle
control. You could have an injury accident. Do not
drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
TRAC-LOK姞 REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok威 rear axle provides a constant driving force
to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the
loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs
between the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more
torque to the wheel that has traction.
341
Trac-Lok威 is especially helpful during slippery driving
conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a
slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
5
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK姞) — RUBICON MODELS
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower switch
To activate the system, press the bottom of the AXLE
bank (below the climate controls).
LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only (the “Rear
Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate), press the
bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle (the
“Front Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illuminate). When
the rear axle is locked, pressing the switch again will lock
or unlock the front axle.
NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are
fully locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, press the top of the AXLE LOCK
switch.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L
(Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
This feature will only activate when the following con- position.
ditions are met:
Axle Lock Switch
• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
STARTING AND OPERATING
343
The rear axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken
REAR AXLE LOCK (FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to
NON-RUBICON MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED
The REAR AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower the LOCK position.
switch bank (below the climate controls).
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF
This feature will only activate when the following con- EQUIPPED
ditions are met:
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater
• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
front suspension travel in off-road situations.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
To activate the system, press the REAR AXLE LOCK located on the lower switch bank (below the climate
switch down to lock the rear axle (the “Rear Axle Lock controls).
Indicator Light” will illuminate); press the switch up to
unlock the rear axle.
NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axle is
fully locked or unlocked.
5
344
STARTING AND OPERATING
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal
driving conditions.
WARNING!
Sway Bar Switch
Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Press
the switch again to deactivate the system. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash during activation transition, or
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard-surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h); you may lose control of the vehicle, which
could result in serious injury. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for maintaining control of the vehicle. The system monitors
vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the
stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is
indicated by a flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator
Light.” Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to
return to off-road mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H
or 4L (refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this
section) and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the
off-road position. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will
flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side
to side.
345
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do not
attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss
of control of the vehicle, which could result in
serious injury. Contact your local authorized dealer
for assistance.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
To return to on-road mode, press the SWAY BAR switch ordinary cars.
again.
5
346
STARTING AND OPERATING
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage.
1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.
2. Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
347
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore,
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always
be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
3. Remove the side step assembly.
The Basics of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving offroad. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
5
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
When to Use 4L (Low) Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low
speed pulling power. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where additional low speed pulling power
is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4L (Low) range.
Simultaneous Brake and Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud and Sand
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and
the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to
a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Overrevving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and
forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the
tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use
second gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic
transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)
position to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a
1/4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction.
Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage
and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep
it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle
can be safely recovered if stuck.
349
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail,
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are
going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi
(103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced
tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and
handling while driving on the soft sand, but you must
return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on
pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way
to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.
5
350
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks and Other High
Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
Using a Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases, have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side
wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with
your tires.
CAUTION!
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing a Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
351
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
5
352
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high-centered.
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Getting High-Centered
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
STARTING AND OPERATING
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission into a lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and
proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum as
you climb the hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start
up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If
the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle
slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you
approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as
you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator
and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no
more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will
353
provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually
provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.
Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine
if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow,
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel
5
354
STARTING AND OPERATING
confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you
are in 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured.
Driving Across an Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across
an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels,
which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or
rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with
firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at
an angle heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
If You Stall or Begin to Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift
into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing
engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
STARTING AND OPERATING
355
your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if
something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (autohill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in matic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L
NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never (Low) position and proceed very slowly with a constant
drive diagonally across a hill; always drive straight slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and
light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to
up or down.
accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water
higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water. should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only ingestion.
be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
WARNING!
5
356
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you
drive too fast or through too deep of water. Water
can cause permanent damage to engine, driveline
or other vehicle components, and your brakes will
be less effective once wet and/or muddy.
• This vehicle is capable of crossing through water
at a depth of 30 inches (76 cm) at speeds no greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h). Water ingestion can occur
causing damage to your vehicle.
muddy waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing
is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On
soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this
when determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas or Other
Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
Before You Cross Any Type of Water
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
As you approach any type of water, you need to deter- angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water
mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If neces- holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to
sary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier
a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or
STARTING AND OPERATING
357
vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. Even
method.
the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough to
CAUTION!
push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.
Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current,
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effecthe water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition and
tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading
slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers or
Other Flowing Water
WARNING!
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in control. This could put you and your passengers at
very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt risk of injury or drowning.
out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle
in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury After Driving Off-Road
and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
greater than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
5
358
STARTING AND OPERATING
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you • After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, brake royour vehicle ready when you need it.
tors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
WARNING!
exhaust system for damage.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
required.
not have full braking power when you need it to
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on prevent an accident. If you have been operating your
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus- vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the and cleaned as necessary.
values specified in the Service Manual.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
propeller shafts.
correct the situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
359
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. Power Steering Fluid Check
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
5
360
STARTING AND OPERATING
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE
NOTE: This vehicle is not equipped with a selfadjusting parking brake system. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the proper maintenance
intervals.
To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull
up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The instrument cluster “Brake Warning Light”
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving
the vehicle.
361
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked, and
the shift lever is in the PARK position (automatic transmission), or REVERSE, or first gear (manual transmission). When parking on a hill, you should apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK;
otherwise, the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shifter out of
PARK.
5
WARNING!
Parking Brake
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may allow
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
362
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low speed selfthe driver is not in the vehicle.
test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for any reason your
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the (20 km/h), this check will be delayed until 25 mph
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse (40 km/h).
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
STARTING AND OPERATING
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during
the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to provide the
regulated hydraulic pressure. The motor pump makes a
low humming noise during operation; this is normal.
During off-road use, loss of traction can temporarily
defeat the system and cause the warning light to illuminate. Turn the ignition to LOCK and ON again to restore
Anti-Lock Brake System function.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
363
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can they increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
5
364
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions, and are commonly referred to as
ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this
manual for more information about ABS.
System is functioning.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and
Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All of these systems work
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can they increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
365
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to
“ESC (Electronic Stability Control)” in this section.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
Traction Control System (TCS)
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
5
366
STARTING AND OPERATING
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the clutch pedal (manual transmission only) remains pressed during the application of the throttle,
the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll
down the incline. This could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. To avoid this, do not apply
throttle while pressing the clutch pedal until you are
ready to release the clutch. Always remember the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
367
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills, with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer where the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur, which
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
activate:
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
• Vehicle must be stopped
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
in DRIVE (automatic transmission equipped vehicle),
• Vehicle must be on an 7% or greater incline (3% for
and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.
manual transmission equipped vehicles)
5
368
STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA on Automatic Transmission Vehicles
Towing with HSA
The system will work in REVERSE, and all forward gears HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission. when pulling a trailer.
The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
WARNING!
NEUTRAL.
HSA on Manual Transmission Vehicles
The system will work in REVERSE, forward gears, and
NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles.
The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual
vehicles, thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a
short period while in NEUTRAL, regardless of clutch
position. To prevent this, do not attempt to roll down a
hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and
letting gravity act on the vehicle, as the HSA will prevent
the vehicle from rolling. Instead, use the appropriate gear
for moving in the desired direction.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in
PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll
down the hill and could cause a collision with
another vehicle or object. Always remember to use
the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that
the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
369
3. With the engine running, the brake applied, and the
clutch out, rotate the steering wheel a half a turn counterclockwise from center.
4. Press the “ESC Off” switch four times within twenty
seconds.
5. Rotate the steering wheel a full turn clockwise (half
turn clockwise from center).
6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
HSA Off
7. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this Malfunction Indicator Light” will blink several times to
procedure:
confirm HSA is off.
1. Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK (auto- Steps 1-7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off
matic transmission) or NEUTRAL with clutch out HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to re-enable HSA functionality.
(manual transmission) with wheels straight. Apply parking brake on manual transmission vehicle.
2. Start the engine.
5
370
STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or
rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors such as road conditions, leaving the roadElectronic Stability Control (ESC)
way or striking objects or other vehicles.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
NOTE: Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off” the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to ESC (Electronic Stability corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applyControl) for a complete explanation of the available ESC ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
modes.
STARTING AND OPERATING
371
counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine ESC Malfunction Indicator Light
The ⬙ESC Malfunction Indicator Light⬙ located
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon
the desired path.
as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
becomes active. The ⬙ESC Malfunction Indicapath intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
tor Light⬙ also flashes when TCS is active. If the ⬙ESC
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
Malfunction Indicator Light⬙ begins to flash during acthe intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
understeer condition.
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
372
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed
in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESCequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
If the “ESP/BAS Warning Light” comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in either the ESC or the BAS system, or both. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles/kilometers at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESP/BAS Warning Light” comes on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC System
will be ON even if it was previously turned off.
ESP/BAS Warning Light
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESC is • The ESC Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
BAS Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. It should go out with the engine running.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The ESC system has three available operating modes in
4H range. The system has one operating mode in 4L
range. Two-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive
vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes.
4H Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models) or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H and
2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or the
transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4L range or
NEUTRAL back to 4H range, the ESC system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for most all driving
situations. The ESC should only be turned to “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. When in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion
of ESC has been disabled and the “ESC Malfunction
373
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
5
374
STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle speed is reduced below 35 mph (56 km/h), the
ESC Off (4H Range Only)
ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode.
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu• The “ESC OFF” message will display and the audible
verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the
pressing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for five
PARK position from any position other than PARK,
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
and then moved out of the PARK position. This will
running. In this mode, all ESC and TCS stability features
occur even if the message was previously cleared.
are turned off except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS section. After five seconds, a chime
WARNING!
will sound, the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF⬙ message will appear in the With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
odometer. Refer to “Compass and Mini-Trip Computer stability offered by ESC and ERM are unavailable. In
— If Equipped” in Section 4 of this manual. To turn ESC an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC and ERM
on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This systems will not engage to assist in maintaining
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
stability. The “Full Off” ESC mode is intended for
off-road use only.
NOTE:
• The ESC system will change to “Partial Off” mode if
the vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph (64 km/h). After the
STARTING AND OPERATING
375
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in
ESC Off
the PARK position from any position other than PARK,
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range.
and then moved out of the PARK position. This will
Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range, or the
occur even if the message was previously cleared.
transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4H range or
NEUTRAL to 4L range, the ESC system will be in this
WARNING!
mode. In 4L range, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited
slip” feature described in the TCS section, are turned off With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (48 km/h). At stability offered by ESC and ERM are unavailable. In
40 mph (48 km/h), the normal ESC stability function
an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC and ERM
returns but TCS remains off. When the vehicle speed systems will not engage to assist in maintaining
drops below 35 mph (40 km/h), the ESC system shuts off. stability. The “Full Off” mode is intended for offThe ESC is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it road use only.
will not interfere with off-road driving, but the ESC
function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds
above 40 mph (48 km/h). The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” will always be illuminated in 4L range when
ESC is off.
4L Range (Four-Wheel Drive Models)
5
376
STARTING AND OPERATING
Disabling ESC for Modified Vehicles (Four-Wheel
Drive Models Only)
Vehicles modified with larger tires and/or suspension
lifts may experience early ESC activations as compared to
a non-modified production vehicle depending on lift
size, tire size, suspension changes and/or driving habits.
If early ESC activations are experienced while driving a
modified vehicle, the additional ability to permanently
turn off ESC is available. A steering wheel/ESC button
maneuver must be performed to permanently disable
ESC and defeat the functionality of the “ESC Off” switch.
Repeating the procedure will return the system to normal
ESC operation and restore ESC switch functionality allowing ESC “Partial” or “Off” modes.
WARNING!
With ESC in the permanent disable mode, enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC and ERM systems is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to
assist in maintaining stability. This disabled mode is
intended for off-highway or off-road use only. Vehicle modifications requiring the owner to configure
the vehicle in the ESC disabled mode, will seriously
affect the vehicle’s roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to loss of control and/or accident resulting
in possible serious or fatal injuries.
The following procedure will disable (or re-enable) ESC
functionality in the vehicle:
1. Shift the transfer case into the 4H range position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
377
2. Turn the steering wheel until it is centered and the 10. Press and hold the “ESC Off” button for seven
wheels are pointed straight ahead.
seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition key OFF to ON.
11. Cycle the ignition key to OFF.
4. Wait approximately five seconds for the system bulb After performing the ESC disable procedure correctly,
check.
“ESC OFF” will be displayed in the odometer for approximately 12 seconds each time the ignition is moved
5. Turn and hold the steering wheel one-half turn to the
to ON. Repeating the ESC disable procedure will reright (clockwise).
enable normal ESC operation.
6. Press and hold the “ESC Off” button for seven secTrailer Sway Control (TSC)
onds.
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces7. Turn the steering wheel back to center, and turn and sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
hold an additional one-half turn to the left (counterclock- actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the approwise).
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
8. Press and hold the “ESC Off” button for seven secwill become active automatically once an excessively
onds.
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
9. Turn the steering wheel back to center.
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
5
378
STARTING AND OPERATING
follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
“Trailer Towing” in Section 5 of this manual for more
Tire Markings
information on towing a trailer with your vehicle. When
TSC is functioning, the “ESC Malfunction Indicator
Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or
“Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING
379
NOTE:
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designamolded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
380
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING
381
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
382
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING
383
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
5
Tire Placard Location (Four-Door Models)
Tire Placard Location (Two-Door Models)
384
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
STARTING AND OPERATING
385
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
the weight referenced here.
calculated in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu- 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
on your vehicle’s placard.
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE:
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and paslate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
(392 kg).
[295 kg]).
5
386
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
387
Safety
WARNING!
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can
cause damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
5
388
STARTING AND OPERATING
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Placard Location (Two-Door Models)
STARTING AND OPERATING
389
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
Tire Placard Location (Four-Door Models)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire
Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflainspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least tion pressure molded into the tire side wall.
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
temperature changes.
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
390
STARTING AND OPERATING
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
and cold tire inflation pressures.
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
WARNING!
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
High speed driving with your vehicle under load is
dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident.
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity at
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Tire Pressures for High-Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial-Ply Tires
391
WARNING!
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
Tread Wear Indicators
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
to help you in determining when your tires should be
Tire Spinning
replaced.
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
5
392
STARTING AND OPERATING
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
with oil, grease and gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
refer to your original equipment or contact an authorized
tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
393
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
5
394
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
• Use chains on P225/75R16 tires only. P255/75R17,
P255/70R18, and LT255/75R17 tires do not provide
adequate clearance.
• Use SAE class “S” tire chains or traction devices only.
• Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
• Follow tire chain manufacturer’s instructions for
mounting chains.
• Install chains snugly and tighten after 0.6 mile (1 km)
of driving.
TIRE CHAINS
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Install chains on rear tires only. Tire chains may be
installed on all models except the Sahara and Rubicon. • Drive cautiously, avoiding large bumps, potholes and
Follow these recommendations to guard against damage
extreme driving maneuvers.
and excessive tire and chain wear:
STARTING AND OPERATING
395
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
5
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
396
STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires — General Information” in this section for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven; this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure
must be increased to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to be turned OFF. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) air pressure of
35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only
after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. The TPMS pressures
have been established for the tire size equipped
on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
397
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
(Continued)
5
398
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
the tire.
wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size
Base System
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure sound.
readings to the Receiver Module.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an autire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
dible chime will be activated when one or more of
the proper pressure.
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
STARTING AND OPERATING
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
399
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain on solid when
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. A
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios:
pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
be ON, and a chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) will turn
sensors.
5
400
STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as
long as none of the road tires are below the low
pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. For each subsequent ignition
key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair
or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING
401
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
following licenses:
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considUnited States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 ering service for the vehicle.
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123 Over 40 auto manufacturer’s worldwide have issued and
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
All engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates, and are speyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imhigh speeds can cause damage, and immediate service is prove air quality.
required.
5
402
STARTING AND OPERATING
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine
and fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems and may damage critical fuel system components.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
STARTING AND OPERATING
403
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask
E-85 perform the following:
your gasoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
It is even more important to look for gasoline without
• change the engine oil and oil filter
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the higher than those allowed in the United States.
engine controller memory
MMT is prohibited in Federal and CaliforniaMore extensive repairs will be required for prolonged reformulated gasoline.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
Materials Added To Fuel
MMT In Gasoline
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num- detergents or other additives are not needed under
ber. Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT has shown fuel.
to reduce sparkplug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your
5
404
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance, and damage the emission control
system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
405
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the swing gate closed when driving your
vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other
poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
406
STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is filled.
Fuel Filler Cap
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
407
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL off.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
VEHICLE LOADING
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
Certification Label
tightened.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
the vehicle is refueled.
5
408
STARTING AND OPERATING
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the month, day, and
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle’s GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
components, sometimes specified by purchasers for inThe GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle creased durability, does not necessarily increase the veincluding driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer hicle’s GVWR.
tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maxiTire Size
mum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR).
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
GAWR are not exceeded.
capacity of this tire size.
Payload
Rim Size
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
listed.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
STARTING AND OPERATING
409
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerInflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
Curb Weight
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is
added.
distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
the brakes operate.
5
410
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing-related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully-loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements supported by the scale.
and recommendations in this Owner’s Manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING
411
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted
and trailer when weighed in combination.
on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not
be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Frontal Area
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
width of the front of a trailer.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or Trailer Sway Control — If Equipped
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
rear GAWR.
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
WARNING!
tongue. It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unIt is important that you do not exceed the maximum
wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
5
412
STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. This kind of
hitch is the most popular on the market today and is
commonly used to tow small and medium-sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. It is typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds,
and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight-distributing
(load-equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier
tongue weights (TW) and may be required depending on
vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight-Distributing Hitch Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
413
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
414
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
Model
3.8L/Manual
3.21
3.8L/Manual
3.73
3.8L/
Automatic
3.8L/Manual
3.73
3.21
3.8L/Manual
3.73
Two–Door X
Model (4WD)
Two–Door X
Model (4WD)
Two–Door X
Model (4WD)
Two–Door Sahara Model
(4WD)
Two–Door Sahara Model
(4WD)
GCWR (Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
5,049 lbs
(2 290 kg)
6,049 lbs
(2 744 kg)
6,051 lbs
(2 745 kg)
5,231 lbs
(2 373 kg)
Frontal Area
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer
Wt.)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
6,231 lbs
(2 826 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
3.8L/
Automatic
3.73
3.8L/Manual
4.10
3.8L/
Automatic
4.10
3.8L/
Automatic
3.8L/
Automatic
3.73
3.73
Model
GCWR (Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
6,233 lbs
Two–Door Sahara Model
(2 827 kg)
(4WD)
2–Door Rubi6,365 lbs
con Model
(2 887 kg)
(4WD)
Two–Door Ru6,366 lbs
bicon Model
(2 887 kg)
(4WD)
Four–Door X
7,734 lbs
Model (2WD)
(3 508 kg)
Four–Door
7,893 lbs
Sahara Model
(3 580 kg)
(2WD)
Frontal Area
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
415
Max. GTW
Max. Trailer
(Gross Trailer Tongue Wt.
Wt.)
(See Note)
2,000 lbs
200 lbs (91 kg)
(907 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
25 sq ft
(2.32 sq m)
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
5
416
STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
Model
3.8L/Manual
3.21
3.8L/Manual
3.73
3.8L/
Automatic
3.8L/Manual
3.73
3.21
3.8L/Manual
3.73
Four–Door X
Model (4WD)
Four–Door X
Model (4WD)
Four–Door X
Model (4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
Four–Door
Sahara Model
(4WD)
GCWR (Gross
Combined
Wt. Rating)
5,431 lbs
(2 463 kg)
7,931 lbs
(3 597 kg)
7,932 lbs
(3 598 kg)
5,625 lbs
(2 551 kg)
Frontal Area
8,125 lbs
(3 685 kg)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
32 sq ft
(2.97 sq m)
Max. GTW
Max. Trailer
(Gross Trailer Tongue Wt.
Wt.)
(See Note)
1,000 lbs
100 lbs (45 kg)
(453 kg)
3,500 lbs
350 lbs
(1 587 kg)
(159 kg)
3,500 lbs
350 lbs
(1 587 kg)
(159 kg)
1,000 lbs
100 lbs (45 kg)
(453 kg)
3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/
Transmission
Axle
3.8L/
Automatic
3.73
3.8L/Manual
4.10
3.8L/
Automatic
4.10
Model
GCWR (Gross Frontal Area
Max. GTW
Combined
(Gross Trailer
Wt. Rating)
Wt.)
8,127 lbs
Four–Door
32 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Sahara Model
(3 686 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
(1 587 kg)
(4WD)
Four–Door
8,248 lbs
32 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Rubicon
(3 741 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
(1 587 kg)
Model (4WD)
Four–Door
8,249 lbs
32 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Rubicon
(3 742 kg)
(2.97 sq m)
(1 587 kg)
Model (4WD)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the “Tire
Safety Information” section in this manual.
417
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
350 lbs
(159 kg)
Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side
5
418
STARTING AND OPERATING
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
put in or on your vehicle.
many trailer accidents.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recomConsider the following items when computing the
mended:
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The trailer tongue weight.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubricant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
419
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
5
420
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into first gear. And
with four-wheel-drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in N (Neutral). Always, block
or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires–General Information” in this section for proper
tire inflation procedures.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
421
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage − An electronically-actuated trailer brake controller is
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Inforrequired when towing a trailer with electronically
mation” in this section for the proper inspection proactuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
cedure.
a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for proper tire replacement proce- − Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
422
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package will include a four–pin wiring
harness. Use a factory-approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustration.
STARTING AND OPERATING
423
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
“O/D OFF” feature should be selected.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
NOTE: Using “O/D OFF” while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
5
424
STARTING AND OPERATING
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Mainyou can get back to cruising speed.
tenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the proper mainte− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
nance intervals.
maximize fuel efficiency.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
Cooling System
before towing.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overO/D Off
heating, take the following actions:
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over− Highway Driving
heating, select the “O/D OFF” feature when driving in
Reduce speed.
hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2
on more severe grades. Refer to “Automatic Transmis- − Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
sion” in this section.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur
if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the rear driveshaft is removed. See your authorized dealer or refer to
the Service Manual. Towing with the rear wheels on the
ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in
severe transmission damage.
425
Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral), automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK,
and manual transmission must be placed in gear (not in
NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
Shifting Into Neutral (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
426
STARTING AND OPERATING
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 6. Shift the automatic transmission into DRIVE or the
recreational towing.
manual transmission into gear.
CAUTION!
7. Release the brake pedal and ensure that there is no
vehicle movement.
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
8. Turn the engine off and turn the ignition switch to the
ACC position.
9. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK.
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Press the brake pedal.
10. Apply the parking brake.
11. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with the tow bar.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
12. Release the parking brake.
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
13. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and secure it
4. Shift the transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
away from the negative battery post.
5. Start the engine.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
N (Neutral) and the engine running. With the transfer case in N (Neutral) ensure that the engine is off
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK (refer to
steps 8 – 9 above).
427
4. Start the engine.
5. Shift the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release
the clutch on manual transmissions.
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral)
on automatic transmission-equipped vehicles, turning
the engine off may be required to avoid gear clash.
CAUTION!
Shifting Out of Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or
press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
3. Shift the transfer case lever into the desired position.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 438
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
6
430
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
lower switch bank below the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
431
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
6
432
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
Spare Tire Stowage
To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage
cover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lug
compartment. Refer to “Storage” in Section 3 of this
wrench turning them counterclockwise.
manual.
NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to the
spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross
weight of 50 lbs (23 kg) including the weight of the spare
tire.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Jack Storage
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or a
manual transmission into REVERSE.
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
433
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
434
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored
location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack
handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the
vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown. Do
not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
435
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
Jacking Locations
1 — Rear Jacking Location
2 — Front Jacking Location
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise. To avoid the risk
of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left,
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right.
and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. 9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct
6
436
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a carefully.
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
WARNING!
station.
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper
locations.
JUMP-STARTING
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the
battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in your eyes or on skin, flush the
contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away
from the vent holes.
• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12 Volt system (i.e.,
do not use a 24 Volt power source).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets which might make an unintended electrical
contact.
437
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles, shift the automatic transmission into
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
PARK, or the manual transmission into NEUTRAL, and
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
turn the ignition to LOCK.
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri- a good contact on the engine.
cal loads.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
battery.
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
6
438
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Any procedure other than above could result in:
• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent.
• Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion.
• Damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or of the immobilized vehicle.
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing
or towing.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
(Continued)
• During cold weather when temperatures are below the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above the
freezing point before attempting a jump-start.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are
mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
439
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method could
result in extensive damage to the transfer case and/or
transmission.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle. Tow straps are recommended
when towing the vehicle, chains may cause vehicle
damage.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment – 3.8L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 444
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
7
442
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . 465
▫ Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
▫ Hydraulic Clutch Fluid — Manual
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 468
▫ Transfer Case — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Maintenance After Off-Road Driving . . . . . . 470
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
▫ Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 490
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . 478
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
443
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 3.8L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Integrated Power Module
— Battery
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
444
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
445
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacestarted. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob- ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- crank or start the engine.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not 3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II this test over.
system is ready for testing.
4. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently a normal bulb check.
7
446
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
447
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
any procedure yourself.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
CAUTION!
penalties being assessed against you.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perWARNING!
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
You can be badly injured working on or around a
components or negatively impact vehicle performotor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
dealership or qualified repair center.
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me(Continued)
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
7
448
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding 1 U.S. Quart (0.95L) of oil when the
reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a
reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
449
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
been certified by the American
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
Petroleum Institute (API). The
information on this system.
manufacturer only recommends
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
API Certified engine oils.
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
450
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
additives.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
ment” in this section.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certiindiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numenvironment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
ber, should not be used.
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
Synthetic Engine Oils
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
Synthetic engine oils can be used if the recommended oil your area.
quality requirements are met, and the recommended
Engine Oil Filter
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
followed.
oil change.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
451
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of the manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of
engine backfire. Do not remove the air cleaner unless
it is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure
that no one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Always wash hands
after handling the battery.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainproper maintenance intervals.
tenance required.
7
452
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Also, if a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the battery.
Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting
voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
453
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
7
454
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent, directly into the
lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be
exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
455
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
456
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
457
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condiand abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
tions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturer’s specifica- • Do not allow the vehicle to run out of fuel.
tions, should be obtained immediately.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
age:
7
458
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
459
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
the specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the antifreeze/engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
7
460
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol base engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentraYour vehicle has been built with an improved engine
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
(-37°C) are anticipated.
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replace- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
period, it is important that you use the same engine
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
changes.
461
WARNING!
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap
to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
reserve tank.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by aniaccumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
7
462
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
any ground spills immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing enevidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
a month.
• Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in
the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
463
engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
protected against freezing.
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
mileage, and increased emissions.
required, or if the level in the recovery bottle does not
drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
be pressure-tested for leaks.
system components should be inspected periodically.
• Maintain the engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
at 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
proper maintenance intervals.
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
7
464
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Disc Brakes
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked
whenever the vehicle is serviced. If necessary, add fluid
to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, check system
for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also labeled on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
465
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. It is
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at
the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.
7
466
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check — 42RLE
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 180° F (82° C). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature, the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the HOT
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen
on both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
If the transmission overheats, a “HOTOIL” message will
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
be displayed in the odometer and a chime will sound.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
467
adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait 7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
between the two cold (lower) holes on the dipstick with its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains
the fluid at approximately 70° F (21° C) (room tempera- engaged in the dipstick tube.
ture). If the fluid level is correctly established at room
Special Additives
temperature, it should be between the HOT (upper)
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
reference holes when the transmission reaches 180° F (21°
product and its performance may be impaired by suppleC). Remember it is best to check the level at the normal
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addioperating temperature.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
CAUTION!
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50° F
(10° C), it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7
468
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid — Manual Transmission
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance-free
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the
system must be replaced.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended manual transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.76 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
lubricant has become contaminated with water. If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed
immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
469
Drain
First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug (C). The
Fluid Level Check
recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill
plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.
Transfer Case — If Equipped
CAUTION!
When replacing the plugs, do not overtighten them.
You could damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for the correct fluid type.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
Adding Fluid
Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid
begins to run out of the hole.
7
470
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering and susAdding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level pension. Retighten, if required, to torque values specified
in the Service Manual. Also check for accumulations of
specified above.
vegetation or brush that could become a fire hazard, or
Selection of Lubricant
conceal damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
seals, and propeller shafts. Check the air conditioning
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
drain tube on the lower dash wall in the engine compartfor the correct fluid type.
ment for mud or debris, and clean as required. A plugged
tube will adversely affect air conditioning performance.
Maintenance After Off-Road Driving
After extended operation in mud, sand or water, or
CAUTION!
similar dirty conditions, have your brake drums, brake
linings, and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as
Under frequent heavy-duty driving conditions,
possible. This will prevent any abrasive material from
change all lubricants, and lubricate body compocausing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action.
nents more often than in normal service to prevent
Following off-road usage, completely inspect the under- excessive wear.
body of your vehicle. Check the tires, body structure,
steering, suspension and exhaust system for damage.
Check the threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
471
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near sea-coast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Bird droppings.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
What Causes Corrosion?
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
7
472
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 Special Care
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains,
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate are kept clear
finish.
and open.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
473
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that
de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
packaged and sealed.
Interior Care
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
installing mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
upholstery and carpeting.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch-Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized
dealer has touch-up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or
select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use
scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable and, if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
7
474
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive-type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean or
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
equivalent, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
directly on the mirror.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
475
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the • After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make
buckles do not work properly.
sure it is completely dry before lowering.
Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models
CAUTION!
• Be especially careful when washing the windows by
following the directions for “Care of Fabric Top
Windows.”
WASHING — Use MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or
mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft
bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use MOPAR威 Con• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top vertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild
down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior foaming cleaner on the entire top, but support the top
from underneath.
trim.
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s interior
trim and top, follow these precautions:
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top RINSING — Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by
rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember
material, as damage may result.
to allow the top to dry before lowering it.
• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry
on the paint, leaving a streak.
7
476
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause
water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the weather strips.
• It is recommended that the top be free of water
prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a
door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable
roof panels may damage the seals, causing water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
Care of Fabric Top Windows
CAUTION!
Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic windows
which can be scratched unless special care is taken by
following these directions:
1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a
microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with
cold or warm, clean water, and wipe across the window,
not up and down. MOPAR威 Jeep Soft Glass Window
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine scratches to
improve visibility and provides UV protection to help
prevent yellowing.
2. When washing, never use hot water or anything
stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as
alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.
3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe
with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.
477
should be cleaned and lubricated regularly. Use MOPAR威 Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation. Before applying, make sure
the zipper teeth are clear of sand, mud, and other
materials. Clean both sides of the zipper, not just one
side. Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow
to dry. Aggressively work the MOPAR威 Soft Top Zipper
Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper teeth.
If a stuck zipper slide is experienced, work the MOPAR威
Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into
the zipper slide. Several applications may be required
before the zipper comes free.
4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper
or de-icing chemicals. Use warm water only if you must
6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the
clean the window quickly.
windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may dam5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road
age the windows.
driving will have a major impact on zipper operation.
Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing will
eventually impact window zipper operation. To maintain
ease of use of the window zippers, each window zipper
7
478
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label
that identifies each component is printed on the inside of
the cover.
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J1
—
J2
30 Amp
Pink
J3
—
J4
25 Amp
Natural
J5
25 Amp
Natural
J6
40 Amp
Green
J7
30 Amp
Pink
J8
—
Mini
Fuse
Description
—
Transfer Case Module
—
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door Node
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump
Feed/ESP
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve
Feed/ESP
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J9
40 Amp
Green
J10
30 Amp
Pink
J11
J13
J14
J15
J17
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
PZEV Sec Motor
Feed/Flex Fuel
Headlamp Wash
Relay/Manifold Tuning Valve
Sway Bar
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) — Main
EBL (Rear Window
Defogger)
Rear Blower
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
J18
20 Amp
Blue
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
Mini
Fuse
Description
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) Trans
Range
Radiator Fan
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
—
Front Wiper LO/HI
Front/Rear Washer
15 Amp
Blue
Starter Solenoid
M2
479
20 Amp
Yellow
Spare
Center High-Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)/
Switch Stop Lamp
Feed
Relay Trailer Lighting
(Stop)
7
480
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M3
20 Amp
Yellow
M4
—
M5
—
M6
20 Amp
Yellow
M7
20 Amp
Yellow
M8
20 Amp
Yellow
M9
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Frt/Rear Axle Locker
Relay
—
—
Power Outlet #1/Rain
Sensor
Power Outlet #2
(BATT/ACC SELECT)
Front Heated Seat
Rear Heated Seat (If
Equipped)
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M10
20 Amp
Yellow
M11
10 Amp
Red
Description
Ignition Off Draw —
Vehicle Entertainment
System (IOD-VES),
Satellite Digital Audio
Receiver (SDARS),
DVD, Hands-Free
Module (HFM), RADIO, Antenna (ANT),
Universal Garage
Door Opener
(UGDO), Vanity
Lamp (VANITY LP)
(Ignition Off Draw)
IOD-HVAC/ATC,
MW SENSR, Underhood Lamp (UH
LMP)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M12
30 Amp
Green
M13
20 Amp
Yellow
M14
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Amplifier (AMP)
Ignition Off Draw—
Cabin Compartment
Node (IOD-CCN),
Wireless Control
Module (WCM), SIREN, Multifunction
Control Switch (MULTIFCTN SW)
Trailer Tow (Export
Only)
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M15
20 Amp
Yellow
481
Description
COL MOD, IR SNS,
Heater Ventilation,
Air Conditioning/
Automatic Temperature Control (HVAC/
ATC), Rear View
Mirror (RR VW MIR),
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN), Transfer
Case Switch (T-CASE
SW), RUN/ST, MultiFunction Control
Switch (MULTIFTCN
SW), Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM), Glow
Plug Module (GLW
PLG MOD) — Export
Diesel Only
7
482
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M16
10 Amp
Red
M17
15 Amp
Blue
M18
15 Amp
Blue
M19
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
M20
M21
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
Left Tail/License/
Park Lamp (LT-TAIL/
LIC/PRK LMP)
Right Tail/Park/Run
Lamp (RT-TAIL/
PRK/RUN LMP)
Auto Shut Down
(ASD #1 and #2)
Cabin Compartment
Node Interior Light
(CCN INT LIGHT),
Switch Bank (SW
BANK)
Auto Shut Down
(ASD #3)
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M22
10 Amp
Red
M23
10 Amp
Red
M24
25 Amp
Natural
M25
20 Amp
Yellow
M26
M27
M28
M29
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
—
Description
Right Horn (RT
HORN (HI/LOW)
Left Horn (LT HORN
(HI/LOW)
Rear Wiper (REAR
WIPER)
Fuel Pump (FUEL
PUMP), Diesel Lift
Pump (DSL LIFT
PUMP) — Export
Only
—
Ignition Switch Feed,
Wireless Module
PCM Feed/TCM
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M30
15 Amp
Blue
M31
20 Amp
Yellow
M32
10 Amp
Red
M33
10 Amp
Red
Description
Wiper Motor Frt,
J1962 Diagnostic Feed
Backup Lamps (B/U
LAMPS)
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), TT
EUROPE
Next Generation Controller (NGC), Global
Powertrain Engine
Controller (GPEC)
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M34
10 Amp
Red
M35
M36
M37
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
483
Description
Park Assist (PRK
ASST), Heater Ventilation, Air Conditioning Module (HVAC
MOD), Headlamp
Wash (HDLP WASH),
Compass (COMPAS)
Heated Mirrors
Power Outlet
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Electronic
Stability Program
(ESP), Stop Lamp
Switch (STP LP SW),
Fuel Pump Rly Hi
Control
7
484
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Mini
Fuse
Fuse
M38
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Lock/Unlock Motors
(LOCK/UNLOCK
MTRS)
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may:
• Remove Cartridge fuse #15 in the Power Distribution
Center labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
485
• Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power Distribution ** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.
Center location #11 labeled “IOD Storage.”
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Auto. Trans. Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Heater Control Lamps (2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window
Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . **
Soundbar Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Backup Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (1). . . . . . . . . L.E.D.
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Headlamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that
can be purchased from your local authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized
dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
486
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- 7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually 9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
accelerate the clearing process.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
Headlamp
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
connector locking tab to the lock position.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
4. Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1/4
turn counterclockwise and remove.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn
5. Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining
clockwise.
ring.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park/Turn Signal
487
Front Fog Lamp
1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the 1. Locate the front fog lamp in the front fascia, and
top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
disconnect the electrical connector from underneath.
2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side
and working toward the other.
3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket to replace.
Front Side Marker
1. Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front
side marker socket.
2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1/3 turn
and remove it from the housing. Pull the bulb straight
from the socket to replace.
2. Squeeze locking tabs on bulb inward toward center of
the bulb. Pull bulb straight out of housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
488
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, and Backup Lamp
3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise, then remove it from the housing.
1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light
housing to the body. DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTER 4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.
SCREWS AT ANY TIME.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends
upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire. If service
is needed, obtain the LED/Cover Assembly from your
local authorized dealer.
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/cover in
place on the spare tire carrier.
3. Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED
cover.
2. Separate the housing from the body by pushing the
lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the
body.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
489
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate) — Two Door Models
Fuel (Approximate) — Four Door Models
Engine Oil with Filter
3.8 Liter Engine
Cooling System *
3.8 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
18.5 Gallons
22.5 Gallons
Metric
70 Liters
85 Liters
6 Quarts
5.7 Liters
13 Quarts
12 Liters
7
490
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
RE14PLP5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
87 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
491
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent (meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-9224).
MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent.
226 RBI (Model 44) - MOPAR威 Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API
GL-5) or equivalent. For trailer towing, use MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle
Lubricant (SAE 75W-140) or equivalent. Models equipped with Trac-Lok™
require an additive.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 496 E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 494
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
494
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
C
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “CHAngE OIL” will
flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE:
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change
individual using any automotive part that has been
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califorilluminated.
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
495 M
A
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if I
N
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
required.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals Once a Month
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
ever comes first.
damage.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
after completing the scheduled oil change. If this schedas required.
uled oil change is performed by someone other than your
dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
described under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Inadd as needed.
strument Cluster Description” section of this manual.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct L
E
operation.
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
496
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the manual transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
497 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or 30 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
499 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
A ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
C ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
E ❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
501 M
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change
if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 502 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
N ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
C ❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
E
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer
towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
503 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 504 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
N
T 78 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
505 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 506 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
N
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
A ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
C ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
E ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the ignition cables.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
507 M
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 508 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).
N ❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
C ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
E ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
❏
❏
❏
❏
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid, and filter(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change
if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
509 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
8
M 510 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
N
T 138 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or 150 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
511 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
512
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 515
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 518
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 516
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 516
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
9
514
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
515
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
9
516
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is why you should always talk to an authorized • Vehicle delivery date and mileage
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be reChrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 992-1997
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
center.
Phone: (800) 465–2001
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
517
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
9
518
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
519
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in 3V9.
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
9
520
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diawebsite or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masgrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practitercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vefor an order form.
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bymanuals (no P.O. Boxes).
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
• Service Manuals
and equipment.
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
• Owner’s Manuals
information that students and professional technicians
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC veLLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
capabilities and safety tips.
and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
521
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
522
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
524
INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,362
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 451
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,315
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,74,250
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,364
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 142
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Axle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,343
INDEX
525
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,405
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,309
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,445
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,61,67,70
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,67
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 23
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,74
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Brake Assist Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,364
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 72
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485,486
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10
526
INDEX
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,281,284,293
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Selection of Coolant
Corrosion Protection
Cruise Light . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance
(Antifreeze)
.........
.........
.........
.........
. . . . . . . . . 459,489
. . . . . . . . . . . . 471
. . . . . . . . . . . . 251
. . . . . . . . . . . . 145
. . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,310,313
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
INDEX
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Used Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Dual Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
142
142
364
364
365
370
370
365
527
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 139
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 259
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 445,494
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,405
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
10
528
INDEX
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401,489
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448,489
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 57
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,405
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,455
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473,475
Fabric Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,247,487,488
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 490
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
INDEX
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,487
Fold and Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404,406
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
529
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,407,444
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328,333
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17,112,400
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,411
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,410
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10
530
INDEX
Hard Top, Modular . . .
Hard Top Removal . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher
Head Restraints . . . . . .
Head Rests . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Bulb Replacement . . .
Dimmer Switch . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . .
High Beam Indicator . .
Hill Start Assist . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . .
Hood Release . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid .
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
153
161
430
122
122
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
486
132
486
130
309
327
247
366
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
413
145
128 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
468 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,433,434
INDEX
531
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,129
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,74,250
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,372
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . 256
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,67
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,371,372
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 259
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10
532
INDEX
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,487
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,131,247,487,488
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 246
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Locking Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,343
Locks
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,67
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
INDEX
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 256,445
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327,468
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Modular Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446,519
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
533
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,254
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,489
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450,489
10
534
INDEX
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444,445
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,430 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 6,520
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 384
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 425
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 427
INDEX
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,64
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
535
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,74
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 45
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,70
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
10
536
INDEX
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Fold and Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,126
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,281,284,293
Shift Lock Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,131,247,487,488
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,198
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
INDEX
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146,484
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,484
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Sunrider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,228
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 48
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Swing Gate, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
537
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 250
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 383,384
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,387,521
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
10
538
INDEX
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431,434
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,384
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410,439
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401,413
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
INDEX
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465,468
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,247,487,488
539
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,407
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,484
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10
540
INDEX
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Windshield, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,454
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement